WO2021023208A1 - 数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统 - Google Patents

数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021023208A1
WO2021023208A1 PCT/CN2020/107034 CN2020107034W WO2021023208A1 WO 2021023208 A1 WO2021023208 A1 WO 2021023208A1 CN 2020107034 W CN2020107034 W CN 2020107034W WO 2021023208 A1 WO2021023208 A1 WO 2021023208A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
receiving device
terminals
ble
aoa
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/107034
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
章亚
张金明
许浩维
王利平
王同波
王良
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021023208A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021023208A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04883—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H04M1/72457—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions according to geographic location
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/725—Cordless telephones
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of short-distance communication technologies, and in particular to methods, graphical user interfaces, related devices and systems for data sharing.
  • terminals such as smart phones and tablet computers have begun to support users to share data such as pictures and documents, which has improved users' office efficiency and office experience.
  • users can share data such as pictures and documents on portable terminals such as smartphones to other devices without using a data cable.
  • users who want to share pictures and other data on portable terminals such as smart phones can generally achieve the goal in the following way: the user needs to select a photo in the gallery and click the "share" button to open the sharing interface. Then, after the smart phone searches for surrounding devices, the options of surrounding devices can be displayed on the device sharing interface. After the user clicks the button to select a peripheral device, the smart phone can connect with the device selected by the user and send the picture selected by the user to the device selected by the user.
  • This application provides a data sharing method, graphical user interface, related device and system, which can simplify the operation steps for users to share file data (such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.), and provide convenience to users.
  • file data such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.
  • this application provides a data sharing method, including: a first terminal displays a file display interface, and the file display interface displays a file object.
  • the first terminal receives the user's sliding operation on the file object.
  • the first terminal obtains location information from one or more second terminals through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE.
  • the first terminal determines the receiving device from the one or more second terminals according to the sliding direction of the sliding operation, the compass angle of the first terminal, and the location information of the one or more second terminals. Wherein, in the one or more second terminals, the angle between the direction of the receiving device relative to the first terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold.
  • the direction of the receiving device relative to the first terminal is determined by the compass angle of the first terminal and the location information of the receiving device.
  • the first terminal sends the file object to the receiving device.
  • the first terminal can receive a user's sliding operation in a file display interface (for example, an interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents), and detect the sliding direction of the sliding operation .
  • the terminal can measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal by using Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) angle of arrival (AoA) measurement technology.
  • BLE Bluetooth Low Energy
  • AoA angle of arrival
  • the first terminal can determine the second device whose direction position is consistent with the sliding direction of the above-mentioned sliding operation and is relatively close, and send the file object in the file display interface to the nearest second device whose direction position is consistent with the sliding direction .
  • the operation steps for users to share file data (such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.) can be simplified, which provides convenience to users.
  • the method before the first terminal obtains location information from one or more second terminals through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE, the method further includes: the first terminal broadcasts a positioning request through BLE. Wherein, the BLE signal strength RSSI when the second terminal receives the positioning request is higher than a specified signal strength threshold. In this way, devices far away from the first terminal can be filtered out, ensuring the stability of file transmission.
  • the method before the first terminal sends the file object to the receiving device, the method includes: the first terminal sends a data sharing request to the receiving device. In response to the data sharing request, the receiving device displays a first prompt for prompting the user to confirm receiving the file object. In this way, the user can confirm on the receiving device whether to receive the file object sent by the first terminal, and avoid the receiving terminal from receiving data that the user does not want to receive.
  • the method further includes: the receiving device establishes a file transmission connection with the first terminal in response to a user's receiving operation on the file object.
  • the file transmission connection includes wireless high-fidelity point-to-point Wi-Fi P2P connection or ultra-wideband UWB connection. In this way, transferring files via Wi-Fi P2P or UWB can improve the efficiency of file transfer.
  • the location information includes: the compass angle of the second terminal, the BLE signal arrival angle AoA of the second terminal, and the distance between the one or more nearby terminals and the terminal.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal displays a second prompt for prompting the user to confirm whether to send the file object to the receiving device.
  • Receiving equipment The first terminal receives the user's confirmation sending operation.
  • the sending of the file object by the first terminal to the receiving device specifically includes that in response to the sending confirmation operation, the first terminal sending the file object to the receiving device. In this way, it is possible to prevent the user from sending the file object to other devices by mistake due to a misoperation on the first terminal, thereby improving fault tolerance.
  • the receiving device when there are multiple third terminals in the one or more second terminals, the angle between the direction of the multiple third terminals relative to the terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold, the receiving device Among the plurality of third terminals, the projection distance in the sliding direction relative to the direction of the first terminal is the shortest. In this way, when there are multiple devices in the sliding direction, only the file is sent to the device closest to the first terminal in the sliding direction, which conforms to the user's usage habits.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal according to the location information of the one or more second terminals And the compass angle of the first terminal determines the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal displays the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal. In this way, it can help users view the location of surrounding devices and improve user experience.
  • the method before the first terminal obtains the location information of one or more second terminals through low-power BLE, the method further includes: the first terminal broadcasts an AoA broadcast packet to the One or more second terminals. After receiving the AoA broadcast packet, the second terminal determines the BLE signal AoA according to the phase information when the AoA broadcast packet is received, and determines the relationship with the first terminal according to the BLE RSSI when the AoA broadcast packet is received. the distance. The BLE AoA, the distance between the second terminal and the first terminal, and the compass angle of the second terminal sent by the second terminal through the BLE broadcast.
  • the present application provides a terminal, which is a first terminal, and includes: a processor, a Bluetooth module, a memory, a touch screen, and a wireless high-fidelity Wi-Fi module.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory, and the processor is connected with the Bluetooth module and the touch screen.
  • the touch screen is used to display a file display interface, and the file display interface displays file objects.
  • the touch screen is also used to receive the user's sliding operation on the file object.
  • the processor is configured to, in response to the sliding operation, instruct the Bluetooth module to obtain location information from one or more second devices through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE.
  • the processor is further configured to determine the receiving device from the one or more second terminals according to the sliding direction of the sliding operation, the compass angle of the terminal, and the location information of the one or more second terminals of the device. Wherein, in the one or more second terminals, the angle between the direction of the receiving device relative to the first terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold. The direction of the receiving device relative to the first terminal is determined by the compass angle of the first terminal and the location information of the receiving device.
  • the Wi-Fi module is used to send the file object to the receiving device.
  • the first terminal may receive a user's sliding operation in a file display interface (for example, an interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents), and detect the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the terminal can measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal through the BLE AoA measurement technology. Then, the first terminal can determine the second device whose direction position is consistent with the sliding direction of the above-mentioned sliding operation and is relatively close, and send the file object in the file display interface to the nearest second device whose direction position is consistent with the sliding direction .
  • file display interface for example, an interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents
  • the Bluetooth module is also used to broadcast a positioning request through BLE before acquiring position information from one or more second terminals through BLE.
  • the BLE signal strength RSSI when the second terminal receives the positioning request is higher than a specified signal strength threshold. In this way, devices far away from the first terminal can be filtered out, ensuring the stability of file transmission.
  • the Bluetooth module is further configured to send a data sharing request to the receiving device before the Wi-Fi module sends the file object to the receiving device.
  • the data sharing request is used to request the receiving device to output a first prompt for prompting the user to confirm receiving the file object. In this way, the user can confirm on the receiving device whether to receive the file object sent by the first terminal, and avoid the receiving terminal from receiving data that the user does not want to receive.
  • the Wi-Fi module is also configured to establish a wireless high-fidelity point-to-point Wi-Fi P2P connection with the receiving device after the receiving device detects the user's receiving operation for the file object. In this way, transferring files via Wi-Fi P2P or UWB can improve the efficiency of file transfer.
  • the location information includes: the compass angle of the second terminal, the BLE signal arrival angle AoA of the second terminal, and the distance between the one or more nearby terminals and the terminal.
  • the touch screen is also used to: before the Wi-Fi module sends the file object to the receiving device, display a second prompt for prompting the user to confirm whether to send the file object to the receiving device The receiving device.
  • the touch screen is also used to receive user confirmation sending operations.
  • the Wi-Fi module is specifically configured to send the file object to the receiving device in response to the confirmation sending operation. In this way, it is possible to prevent the user from sending the file object to other devices by mistake due to a misoperation on the first terminal, thereby improving fault tolerance.
  • the receiving device when there are multiple third terminals in the one or more second terminals, the angle between the direction of the multiple third terminals relative to the terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold, the receiving device Among the plurality of third terminals, the projection distance in the sliding direction relative to the direction of the first terminal is the shortest. In this way, when there are multiple devices in the sliding direction, only the file is sent to the device closest to the first terminal in the sliding direction, which conforms to the user's usage habits.
  • the processor is further configured to: after the Bluetooth module obtains the location information of one or more second terminals through BLE, according to the location information of the one or more second terminals and the The compass angle of the first terminal determines the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal.
  • the touch screen is also used to display the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal. In this way, it can help users view the location of surrounding devices and improve user experience.
  • the Bluetooth module is also used to: before obtaining the location information of one or more second terminals through low-power BLE, send an AoA broadcast packet to the one or more second terminals through BLE broadcast Two terminal.
  • the AoA broadcast packet is used for the second terminal to determine the BLE AoA according to the phase information when receiving the AoA broadcast, and to determine the distance to the first terminal according to the BLE RSSI when the AoA broadcast packet is received.
  • the Bluetooth module is also used to receive the BLE AoA, the distance between the second terminal and the first terminal, and the compass angle of the second terminal sent by the second terminal through the BLE broadcast.
  • the present application provides a chip system, the chip system is set in a first terminal, and the chip system includes a processor and a Bluetooth chip.
  • the processor is used to instruct the touch screen to display a file display interface, and the file display interface displays a file object.
  • the processor is also configured to receive a user's sliding operation on the file object through the touch screen.
  • the processor is further configured to, in response to the sliding operation, instruct the Bluetooth chip to obtain position information from one or more second devices through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE.
  • the processor is further configured to determine the receiving device from the one or more second terminals according to the sliding direction of the sliding operation, the compass angle of the terminal, and the location information of the one or more second terminals of the device.
  • the angle between the direction of the receiving device relative to the first terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold.
  • the direction of the receiving device relative to the first terminal is determined by the compass angle of the first terminal and the location information of the receiving device.
  • the processor is also used to instruct the wireless high-fidelity Wi-Fi module to send the file object to the receiving device.
  • the present application provides a chip system, which can be set in a first terminal.
  • the first terminal may receive a user's sliding operation in a file display interface (for example, an interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents), and detect the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the terminal can measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal through the BLE AoA measurement technology.
  • the first terminal can determine the second device whose direction position is consistent with the sliding direction of the above-mentioned sliding operation and is relatively close, and send the file object in the file display interface to the nearest second device whose direction position is consistent with the sliding direction .
  • the operation steps for users to share file data (such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.) can be simplified, which provides convenience to users.
  • the Bluetooth chip is also used to broadcast a positioning request through BLE before acquiring position information from one or more second terminals through BLE.
  • the BLE signal strength RSSI is higher than the specified signal strength threshold. In this way, devices far away from the first terminal can be filtered out, ensuring the stability of file transmission.
  • the Bluetooth chip is also used to send a data sharing request to the receiving device before the processor instructs the Wi-Fi module to send the file object to the receiving device.
  • the data sharing request is used to request the receiving device to output a first prompt for prompting the user to confirm receiving the file object. In this way, the user can confirm on the receiving device whether to receive the file object sent by the first terminal, and avoid the receiving terminal from receiving data that the user does not want to receive.
  • the processor is further configured to: after the receiving device detects the user's receiving operation on the file object, instruct the WiFi module to establish wireless high-fidelity point-to-point Wi-Fi P2P with the receiving device connection. In this way, transferring files via Wi-Fi P2P or UWB can improve the efficiency of file transfer.
  • the location information includes: the compass angle of the second terminal, the BLE signal arrival angle AoA of the second terminal, and the distance between the one or more nearby terminals and the terminal.
  • the processor is further configured to: before instructing the Wi-Fi module to send the file object to the receiving device, instruct the touch screen to display a second prompt for prompting the user to confirm whether Send the file object to the receiving device.
  • the processor is also used to receive the user's confirmation sending operation through the touch screen.
  • the processor is specifically configured to: in response to the confirmation sending operation, instruct the Wi-Fi module to send the file object to the receiving device. In this way, it is possible to prevent the user from sending the file object to other devices by mistake due to a misoperation on the first terminal, thereby improving fault tolerance.
  • the receiving device when there are multiple third terminals in the one or more second terminals, the angle between the direction of the multiple third terminals relative to the terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold, the receiving device Among the plurality of third terminals, the projection distance in the sliding direction relative to the direction of the first terminal is the shortest. In this way, when there are multiple devices in the sliding direction, only the file is sent to the device closest to the first terminal in the sliding direction, which conforms to the user's usage habits.
  • the processor is further configured to: after the Bluetooth chip obtains the location information of one or more second terminals through BLE, according to the location information of the one or more second terminals and the The compass angle of the first terminal determines the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal.
  • the processor is also used to instruct the touch screen to display the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal. In this way, it can help users view the location of surrounding devices and improve user experience.
  • an AoA broadcast packet is broadcast to the one or more second terminals through BLE.
  • the AoA broadcast packet is used for the second terminal to determine the BLE AoA based on the phase information when receiving the AoA broadcast, and to determine the distance to the first terminal based on the RSSI when the AoA broadcast packet is received.
  • the Bluetooth chip is also used to receive the BLE AoA, the distance between the second terminal and the first terminal, and the compass angle of the second terminal sent by the second terminal through the BLE broadcast.
  • this application provides a data sharing method, which includes: a first terminal displays a file selection interface, and the file selection interface displays file options selected by the user.
  • the first terminal receives the user's first operation.
  • the first terminal obtains location information from one or more second terminals through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE.
  • the first terminal determines the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal according to the location information of the one or more second terminals.
  • the first terminal displays the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal receives a second operation of the user selecting a receiving device in the one or more second terminals.
  • the first terminal sends the file object corresponding to the file option to the receiving device.
  • This application provides a data sharing method.
  • the first terminal can receive the operation, trigger the measurement and display the direction and position of one or more second devices (Including direction and distance). Then, the first terminal receives the user's operation, and selects the file receiving device from the one or more second devices to trigger the first terminal to send the file object selected by the user to the receiving device. In this way, the user can know the location of the nearby device when sharing the file data with the nearby device through the first terminal, which is convenient for the user to determine the receiving device of the file data.
  • the first terminal displays the direction and distance of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal, which specifically includes: the first terminal displays the location mark of the first terminal and the Location markers of one or more second terminals.
  • the direction and distance of the position mark of the second terminal corresponding to the position mark of the first terminal are determined by the compass angle of the first terminal and the position information of the second terminal.
  • the second operation includes: the user's operation on the location mark of the receiving device.
  • the method before the first terminal obtains location information from one or more second terminals through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE, the method further includes: the first terminal broadcasts a positioning request through BLE. Wherein, the BLE signal strength RSSI when the second terminal receives the positioning request is higher than a specified signal strength threshold. In this way, devices far away from the first terminal can be filtered out, ensuring the stability of file transmission.
  • the method before the first terminal sends the file object corresponding to the file option to the receiving device, the method includes: the first terminal sends a data sharing request to the receiving device. In response to the data sharing request, the receiving device displays a first prompt for prompting the user to confirm receiving the file object. In this way, the user can confirm on the receiving device whether to receive the file object sent by the first terminal, and avoid the receiving terminal from receiving data that the user does not want to receive.
  • the method further includes: the receiving device establishes a file transmission connection with the first terminal in response to the user's confirmation receiving operation.
  • the file transfer connection includes wireless high-fidelity point-to-point Wi-Fi P2P connection or ultra-wideband UWB connection. In this way, transferring files via Wi-Fi P2P or UWB can improve the efficiency of file transfer.
  • the method before the first terminal sends the file object corresponding to the file option to the receiving device, the method further includes: the first terminal displays a second prompt for prompting the user to confirm whether to send the The file object corresponding to the file option is given to the receiving device.
  • the first terminal receives the user's confirmation sending operation.
  • the sending of the file object by the first terminal to the receiving device specifically includes: in response to the sending confirmation operation, the first terminal sending the file object to the receiving device. In this way, it is possible to prevent the user from sending the file object to other devices by mistake due to a misoperation on the first terminal, thereby improving fault tolerance.
  • the method before the terminal obtains the location information of one or more second terminals through low-power BLE, the method further includes: the first terminal broadcasts the angle of arrival AoA broadcast packet to the One or more second terminals. After receiving the AoA broadcast packet, the second terminal determines the BLE signal AoA according to the phase information when the AoA broadcast packet is received, and determines the relationship with the first terminal according to the BLE RSSI when the AoA broadcast packet is received. the distance. The second terminal broadcasts the BLE signal AoA and the distance between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • this application provides a data sharing method, the method including: a first terminal displays a first interface.
  • the first terminal receives the user's sliding operation on the first interface.
  • the first terminal obtains location information from one or more display devices through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE.
  • the first terminal determines the screen projection device from the one or more displays according to the sliding direction of the sliding operation, the compass angle of the first terminal, and the one or more displayed position information. Wherein, in the one or more displays, the angle between the direction of the projection device relative to the first terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold.
  • the direction of the projection device relative to the first terminal is determined by the compass angle of the first terminal and the position information of the playback device.
  • the first terminal projects the display content on the touch screen to the projection device for display.
  • the first terminal can receive the user's sliding operation (for example, three-finger sliding) on the first interface (for example, the main interface of the screen), and display the display on the touch screen of the terminal 100
  • the content is projected to the display device that is consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation and is closest in the direction. In this way, the user's screen projection operation steps can be simplified, and the user experience can be improved.
  • the present application provides a data sharing method, the method includes: a first terminal displays a music playing interface, and the music playing interface displays a music file selected by the user to be played or being played.
  • the first terminal receives the user's sliding operation.
  • the first terminal obtains location information from one or more audio devices through Bluetooth Low Energy BLE.
  • the first terminal determines the playback device from the one or more audio devices according to the sliding direction of the sliding operation, the compass angle of the first terminal, and the location information of the one or more audio devices. Wherein, in the one or more audio devices, the angle between the direction of the playback device relative to the first terminal and the sliding direction is less than a preset angle threshold.
  • the direction of the playback device relative to the first terminal is determined by the compass angle of the first terminal and the location information of the playback device.
  • the first terminal establishes a Bluetooth connection with the playback device.
  • the first terminal may send the audio data corresponding to the music file to the audio device for playing.
  • the first terminal can receive the user's sliding operation (for example, three-finger sliding) on the music playing interface, and align the sliding direction of the first terminal and the sliding operation in the same direction.
  • the nearest audio device establishes a Bluetooth connection. After the Bluetooth connection is established, the first terminal can send audio data to the audio device for playback. In this way, the operation steps for the user to select the audio device to play audio data can be simplified, the user's pairing and connection operations for the first terminal and the audio device are reduced, and the user experience is improved.
  • the present application provides a communication device including one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes.
  • the computer program codes include computer instructions.
  • the communication device executes The method of data sharing in any of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which when the computer instructions run on a terminal, cause the terminal to execute the data sharing method in any one of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the data sharing method in any one of the possible implementations of any of the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the framework of a Bluetooth protocol provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic structural diagram of a display device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic structural diagram of an audio device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 3A-3D are schematic diagrams of a group of interfaces in the related technology of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 5A-5J are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by embodiments of the application.
  • 6A-6G are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIGS. 7A-7F are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • 8A-8G are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • 9A-9J are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • 10A-10G are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • 11A-11F are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIGS. 13A-13C are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • 15A-15E are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of a Bluetooth AoA positioning protocol framework provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of the framework of a Bluetooth antenna system provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 19A-19B are schematic diagrams of a set of Bluetooth standard protocol interaction provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • 20 is a schematic diagram of a relative position of a terminal according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a Bluetooth multi-antenna ranging process provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic flowchart of a data sharing method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic flowchart of a data sharing method provided by another embodiment of this application.
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the number of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined with “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • FIG. 1A shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 As an example, it should be understood that the terminal 100 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the terminal 100 may have more or fewer components than those shown in FIG. 1A, may combine two or more components, or may have Different component configurations.
  • the various components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the terminal 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, antenna 1, antenna 2 , Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM Subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include pressure sensor 180A, gyroscope sensor 180B, air pressure sensor 180C, magnetic sensor 180D, acceleration sensor 180E, distance sensor 180F, proximity light sensor 180G, fingerprint sensor 180H, temperature sensor 180J, touch sensor 180K, ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait.
  • AP application processor
  • modem processor modem processor
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the terminal 100.
  • the controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 to store instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory can store instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, and a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous transmitter) interface.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • the I2C interface is a two-way synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc., respectively through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the terminal 100.
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to realize communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170.
  • the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through an I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through a UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the display screen 194, the camera 193 and other peripheral devices.
  • the MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the terminal 100.
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through a DSI interface to realize the display function of the terminal 100.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and so on.
  • GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and so on.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the terminal 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the terminal 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through the headphones. This interface can also be used to connect to other terminals, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is merely illustrative, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the terminal 100. While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the terminal through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charge management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the external memory, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the terminal 100 can be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the terminal 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the terminal 100.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering and amplifying the received electromagnetic waves, and then transmitting them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation via the antenna 1.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through the display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be an independent device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the terminal 100, including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), Bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellite systems. (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • NFC near field communication technology
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 2.
  • the antenna 1 of the terminal 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the terminal 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technologies may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
  • the terminal 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connected to the display 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • active-matrix organic light-emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the terminal 100 may include one or N display screens 194, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the terminal 100 can realize a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back from the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transfers the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
  • the camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats.
  • the terminal 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the terminal 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the terminal 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the terminal 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • applications such as intelligent cognition of the terminal 100 can be realized, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • the external memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the terminal 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the terminal 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function.
  • the data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the terminal 100.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
  • UFS universal flash storage
  • the terminal 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110, or part of the functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • the speaker 170A also called a “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the terminal 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the terminal 100 answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone”, “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can approach the microphone 170C through the mouth to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the terminal 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the terminal 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the terminal 100 may also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (open mobile terminal platform, OMTP) standard interface, and a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
  • the terminal 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance.
  • the terminal 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the terminal 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations that act on the same touch location but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity of the touch operation is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the terminal 100.
  • the angular velocity of the terminal 100 around three axes i.e., x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyro sensor 180B detects the shake angle of the terminal 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the terminal 100 through a reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the terminal 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the terminal 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the terminal 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the terminal 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the terminal 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the terminal's posture, apply to horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
  • the terminal 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the terminal 100 may use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the terminal 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode.
  • the terminal 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the terminal 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the terminal 100 may determine that there is no object near the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the terminal 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light.
  • the terminal 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the terminal 100 is in a pocket to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the terminal 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, and so on.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the terminal 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the terminal 100 executes to reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the terminal 100 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the terminal 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the terminal 100 due to low temperature.
  • the terminal 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194, which is also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • the visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the terminal 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 194.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure pulse signal.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the voice function.
  • the application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
  • the button 190 includes a power button, a volume button, and so on.
  • the button 190 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button.
  • the terminal 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the terminal 100.
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration notification, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate the charging status, power change, or to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect to the SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 195 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc.
  • the same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 may also be compatible with external memory cards.
  • the terminal 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication.
  • the terminal 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the terminal 100 and cannot be separated from the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may also include a magnetometer (not shown in the figure), which may also be called an electronic compass or a compass, which may be used to detect the strength and direction of the magnetic field.
  • a magnetometer not shown in the figure
  • an electronic compass or a compass, which may be used to detect the strength and direction of the magnetic field.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a Bluetooth protocol framework, including but not limited to a host protocol stack (Host), a host controller interface (HCI), and a controller.
  • a host protocol stack Host
  • HCI host controller interface
  • the Host protocol stack defines multiple applications (profiles) and core protocols (protocol) in the Bluetooth framework, each profile defines its own message format and application rules, and the profile is a Bluetooth service (Application).
  • the Bluetooth protocol has formulated specifications for various possible and universal application scenarios, such as the Bluetooth audio distribution profile (advanced audio distribution profile, A2DP), hands-free protocol (hands-free profile, HFP) and so on.
  • Core protocols include but are not limited to Bluetooth's basic service protocol (service discovery protocol, SDP), logical link control and adaptation protocol (logical link control and adaptation protocol, L2CAP), etc.
  • SDP service discovery protocol
  • L2CAP logical link control and adaptation protocol
  • the core protocol is indispensable in the Bluetooth protocol stack.
  • HCI provides a unified interface for the upper layer protocol to enter the link manager and a unified way to enter the baseband.
  • the Bluetooth Special Interest Group specifies four physical bus methods to connect with hardware, namely four HCI transmission layers: USB, RS232, UART, and PC card.
  • the controller defines the underlying hardware, including radio frequency (RF), baseband (BB), and link management (LM).
  • RF radio frequency
  • BB baseband
  • LM link management
  • the RF layer uses 2.4GHz unlicensed ISM band microwaves to filter and transmit data bit streams. It mainly defines the conditions that the Bluetooth transceiver needs to meet in this frequency band.
  • the baseband is responsible for frequency hopping and the transmission of Bluetooth data and information frames.
  • Link management is responsible for connecting, establishing and dismantling links and performing security control.
  • the Link Manager (LM) layer is the link management layer protocol of the Bluetooth protocol stack, which is responsible for translating upper-layer HCI commands into operations acceptable to the baseband, establishing asynchronous connection-oriented link (ACL) and synchronous links Road (synchronous connection-oriented/extended, SCO) and working modes that enable Bluetooth devices to enter an energy-saving state.
  • the link control (LC) layer is responsible for responding to upper-layer LM commands (such as executing LM commands for establishing the transmission link of the data packet and maintaining the link) during the transmission of a batch of data packets.
  • Part of the content of the method described in the embodiment of the present application implemented by the wireless communication module 160 of the terminal 100 shown in FIG. 1A may be implemented by a Bluetooth module or a Bluetooth chip.
  • FIG. 2A exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a display device 200 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display device 200 shown in FIG. 2A is only an example, and the display device 200 may have more or fewer components than those shown in FIG. 2A, two or more components may be combined, or There are different component configurations.
  • the various components shown in the figure can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits,
  • the display device 200 may include: a processor 201, a memory 202, a wireless communication processing module 203, an antenna 204, a power switch 205, a wired LAN communication processing module 206, an HDMI communication processing module 207, and a USB communication processing module 208 , Display 209, audio module 210. among them:
  • the processor 201 can be used to read and execute computer-readable instructions.
  • the processor 201 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operation corresponding to the instruction.
  • the arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 201 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, MIPS architecture, ARM architecture, or NP architecture, etc.
  • the processor 201 may be used to analyze the signals received by the wireless communication module 203 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 206, such as the detection request broadcast by the terminal 100, and so on.
  • the processing 201 may be used to perform corresponding processing operations according to the analysis result, such as generating a detection response, and so on.
  • the processor 201 may also be used to generate signals sent by the wireless communication module 203 and/or the wired LAN communication processing module 206, such as Bluetooth broadcast signals and beacon signals.
  • the memory 202 is coupled with the processor 201, and is used to store various software programs and/or multiple sets of instructions.
  • the memory 202 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 202 can store an operating system, such as embedded operating systems such as uCOS, VxWorks, and RTLinux.
  • the memory 202 may also store a communication program, which may be used for the terminal 100, one or more servers, or accessory devices to communicate.
  • the wireless communication module 203 may include one or more of a Bluetooth communication module 203A, a WLAN communication module 203B, and an infrared communication module 204C.
  • the Bluetooth communication module 203A may include a classic Bluetooth (BT) module and a low energy Bluetooth (BLE) module,
  • one or more of the Bluetooth communication module 203A, WLAN communication module 203B, and infrared communication module 204C can monitor signals transmitted by other devices (such as the terminal 100), such as detection requests, scanning signals, etc. And can send response signals, such as detection response, scan response, etc., so that other devices (such as the terminal 100) can find the display device 200, and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the terminal 100), through Bluetooth, WLAN or infrared One or more wireless communication technologies communicate with other devices (such as the terminal 100).
  • one or more of the Bluetooth communication module 203A, WLAN communication module 203B, and infrared communication module 203C can also transmit signals, such as broadcasting Bluetooth signals and beacon signals, so that other devices (such as the terminal 100) It is possible to discover the display device 200, establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the electronic device 100), and communicate with other devices (such as the electronic device 100) through one or more wireless communication technologies in Bluetooth or WLAN.
  • signals such as broadcasting Bluetooth signals and beacon signals
  • the wireless communication module 203 may also include a cellular mobile communication module (not shown).
  • the cellular mobile communication processing module can communicate with other devices (such as servers) through cellular mobile communication technology.
  • the wireless communication function of the display device 200 can be implemented by the antenna 204, the wireless communication module 203, the modem processor, and the like.
  • the antenna 204 can be used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the display device 200 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • the antenna of the WLAN communication module 203B can be multiplexed as the antenna of the Bluetooth communication module 203A. In other embodiments, the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the Bluetooth communication module 203A may have one or more antennas.
  • the display device 200 can measure the angle of arrival of the Bluetooth signal sent by the terminal 100. arrival, AoA).
  • the power switch 205 can be used to control the power supply to the display device 200 from the power source.
  • the wired LAN communication processing module 206 can be used to communicate with other devices in the same LAN via a wired LAN, and can also be used to connect to a WAN via a wired LAN, and can communicate with devices in the WAN.
  • the HDMI communication processing module 207 can be used to communicate with other devices through an HDMI interface (not shown).
  • the USB communication processing module 208 can be used to communicate with other devices through a USB interface (not shown).
  • the display screen 209 can be used to display images, videos, etc.
  • the display screen 129 can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, or an active-matrix organic light emitting diode (AMOLED). Display screen, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED) display screen, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED) display screen, etc.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active-matrix organic light emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • QLED quantum dot light-emitting diode
  • the audio module 210 can be used to output audio signals through an audio output interface, so that the display device 200 can support audio playback.
  • the audio module can also be used to receive audio data through the audio input interface.
  • the display device 200 may be a media playback device such as a television.
  • the display device 200 may also include a serial interface such as an RS-232 interface.
  • the serial interface can be connected to other devices, such as audio amplifiers such as speakers, so that the display and the audio amplifiers can play audio and video together.
  • FIG. 2A does not constitute a specific limitation on the display device 200.
  • the display device 200 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the Bluetooth protocol framework used by the display device 200 can be referred to as shown in FIG. 1B, which will not be repeated here.
  • the display device 200 may also include a magnetometer 211, which may also be called an electronic compass or a compass, which may be used to detect the strength and direction of the magnetic field.
  • a magnetometer 211 which may also be called an electronic compass or a compass, which may be used to detect the strength and direction of the magnetic field.
  • FIG. 2B exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of an audio device 220 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the audio device 220 shown in FIG. 2B is only an example, and the audio device 220 may have more or less components than those shown in FIG. 2B, may combine two or more components, or may There are different component configurations.
  • the various components shown in the figure can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits,
  • the audio device 220 may include: a processor 221, a memory 222, a Bluetooth communication module 223, an antenna 224, a power switch 225, a USB communication processing module 226, and an audio module 227. among them:
  • the processor 221 may be used to read and execute computer-readable instructions.
  • the processor 221 may mainly include a controller, an arithmetic unit, and a register.
  • the controller is mainly responsible for instruction decoding, and sends out control signals for the operation corresponding to the instruction.
  • the arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for saving the register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions.
  • the hardware architecture of the processor 221 may be an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) architecture, MIPS architecture, ARM architecture, or NP architecture, etc.
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • the processor 221 may be used to parse the signal received by the Bluetooth communication processing module 223, and so on.
  • the processing 221 may be used to perform corresponding processing operations and so on according to the analysis result.
  • the memory 222 is coupled with the processor 221, and is configured to store various software programs and/or multiple sets of instructions.
  • the memory 222 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 222 may store an operating system, such as embedded operating systems such as uCOS, VxWorks, and RTLinux.
  • the memory 222 may also store a communication program, which may be used to communicate with the terminal 100, one or more servers, or other devices.
  • the Bluetooth communication module 223 may include a classic Bluetooth (BT) module and a Bluetooth low energy (BLE) module,
  • the Bluetooth communication module 223 can monitor signals transmitted by other devices (such as the terminal 100), such as detection requests, scan signals, etc., and can send response signals, scan responses, etc., so that other devices (such as the terminal 100) 100)
  • the audio device 220 can be discovered, and a wireless communication connection can be established with other devices (such as the terminal 100), and communicate with other devices (such as the terminal 100) via Bluetooth.
  • the Bluetooth communication module 223 can also transmit signals, such as broadcasting BLE signals, so that other devices (such as the terminal 100) can discover the audio device 220 and establish a wireless communication connection with other devices (such as the terminal 100). Bluetooth communicates with other devices (such as the terminal 100).
  • signals such as broadcasting BLE signals
  • the wireless communication function of the audio device 220 can be implemented by the antenna 224, the Bluetooth communication module 223, the modem processor, and the like.
  • the antenna 224 can be used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the audio device 220 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands.
  • the power switch 225 can be used to control the power supply to the audio device 220 from the power source.
  • the USB communication processing module 206 can be used to communicate with other devices through a USB interface (not shown).
  • the audio module 226 can be used to output audio signals through an audio output interface, so that the audio device 220 can support audio playback.
  • the audio module can also be used to receive audio data through the audio input interface.
  • the audio device 220 may be a media playback device such as a Bluetooth headset.
  • the audio device 220 may further include a display screen (not shown), where the display screen may be used to display images, prompt information, and the like.
  • the display screen can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, active-matrix organic light emitting diode (AMOLED) display Screen, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED) display, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED) display, etc.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active-matrix organic light emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • QLED quantum dot light-emitting diode
  • the audio device 220 may also include a serial interface such as an RS-232 interface.
  • the serial interface can be connected to other devices, such as audio amplifiers such as speakers, so that the audio device 220 and the audio amplifiers cooperate to play audio and video.
  • the audio device 220 may also include a magnetometer 228, which may also be called an electronic compass or a compass, which may be used to detect the magnetic field strength and direction.
  • a magnetometer 228, which may also be called an electronic compass or a compass, which may be used to detect the magnetic field strength and direction.
  • the structure illustrated in FIG. 2B does not constitute a specific limitation on the audio device 220.
  • the audio device 220 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the Bluetooth protocol framework used by the audio device 220 can be referred to as shown in FIG. 1B, which will not be repeated here.
  • the user needs to open the user interface of the gallery application on the terminal.
  • FIG. 3A exemplarily shows a user interface 310 of a gallery application displayed on a terminal such as a smart phone.
  • "Gallery” is a picture management application on smart phones, tablet computers and other terminals, which can also be called “album”.
  • the user interface 310 of the gallery application includes thumbnails of one or more pictures.
  • the user opens the picture display interface in the gallery application.
  • the terminal may receive an input operation (for example, a single click) of the user on the thumbnail 311 in FIG. 3A, and in response to the input operation, the terminal may display a picture display interface 320 as shown in FIG. 3B.
  • an input operation for example, a single click
  • the picture display interface 320 includes a picture 326, a share button 321, a favorite button 322, an edit button 323, a delete button 324, and a more button 325.
  • the picture 326 may have a title, for example, "July 15, 2019".
  • the sharing button 321 can be used to trigger the opening of the picture sharing interface.
  • the favorite button 322 can be used to trigger the favorite picture 326 to the picture favorite folder.
  • the editing button 323 can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotation, trimming, adding filters, and blurring of the picture 326.
  • the delete button 324 can be used to trigger the deletion of the picture 326.
  • the more button 325 can be used to trigger opening more picture-related functions.
  • the terminal may receive an input operation (for example, a click) of the user on the sharing button 321 in FIG. 3B, and in response to the input operation, the terminal may display a file sharing interface 330 as shown in FIG. 3C.
  • an input operation for example, a click
  • the file sharing interface 330 includes an area 331, an area 337, and an area 339. among them:
  • the area 331 may be used to display one or more pictures or videos in the gallery, and the one or more pictures or videos may include pictures or videos selected by the user, such as the selected picture 332.
  • a mark 334 may be displayed on the selected picture 332, and the mark 334 may be used to indicate that the corresponding picture 332 is selected by the terminal (that is, the picture has been selected by the user).
  • the area 331 may also display a control 335 and a control 336. The above two controls (the control 335 and the control 336) can be used to switch or update the picture displayed in the area 331.
  • the picture or video screen displayed in the area 331 may be a thumbnail.
  • the original image corresponding to the picture or video screen displayed in the area 331 may be stored on the terminal.
  • the area 337 can be used to display options for nearby devices discovered by the terminal and one or more user options.
  • This user option corresponds to nearby devices discovered by the terminal.
  • the terminal when the terminal is searching for nearby devices, they can display a search prompt 338 in the area 337 (for example, "a nearby device is being found, the other party needs to turn on Bluetooth, WLAN" and other text prompts).
  • One or more service options may be displayed in the area 339.
  • the application or protocol corresponding to the service option can support sharing the picture selected by the user to the contact or server. Users can share data through the application or protocol corresponding to the service option. For example, sharing the selected picture to one or more contacts of WeChat, or sharing the selected picture to the dynamic publishing platform (ie server) of Facebook.
  • the user can click the nearby device option in the picture sharing interface to share the selected picture to nearby devices.
  • the terminal may display nearby device options or user options corresponding to nearby devices in area 337, for example, user option 341 (user name is "Lisa").
  • the terminal may receive an input operation (for example, a single click) of the user option 341 by the user, and in response to the input operation, the terminal may establish a communication connection with the device corresponding to the user option 341, and then communicate to the device corresponding to the user option through the communication connection Transfer the selected pictures.
  • an input operation for example, a single click
  • a terminal can receive a user's sliding operation in a file display interface (for example, a display interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents), and detect the sliding operation of the sliding operation. direction.
  • the terminal can measure the directional position (including direction and distance) of nearby devices relative to the terminal through Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) AoA measurement technology.
  • BLE Bluetooth Low Energy
  • the terminal can determine the nearest nearby device whose direction relative to the terminal is consistent with the sliding direction of the above-mentioned sliding operation, and send the file object in the file display interface to the nearest device in the direction that is consistent with the sliding direction.
  • Nearby equipment In this way, the operation steps for users to share file data (such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.) can be simplified, which provides convenience to users.
  • FIG. 4 is a system architecture diagram provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the system 40 includes a terminal 100 and nearby devices. Nearby devices include terminal 101, terminal 102, terminal 103, and so on.
  • FIG. 4 exemplarily shows the positional relationship between the terminal 100 and the terminal 101 on the horizontal plane of the terminal 102 and the terminal 103 in some application scenarios of the present application.
  • a reference point for example, a central position point
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 can be used to represent its position in the horizontal plane.
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 may be the direction indicated by the vector whose starting point is perpendicular to the upper edge of the touch screen of the terminal 100, as the reference direction of the terminal 100, which may also be referred to as the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100 .
  • the terminal 101 may be at 0.8 m in the clockwise direction of the terminal 100 at 315 degrees
  • the terminal 102 may be at 1.2 m in the clockwise direction of the terminal 100 at 45 degrees
  • the terminal 103 may be at the clockwise 90 degrees of the terminal 100. 0.5m in the degree direction.
  • the nearby devices of the terminal 100 may not be limited to the three in the above-mentioned FIG. 4, and there may be more or less.
  • the three nearby devices in FIG. 4 are just an example to explain the present application. Constitutive limits.
  • the above-mentioned FIG. 4 exemplarily shows the relative position relationship between the above-mentioned three nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) and the terminal 100.
  • the embodiment of the present application is only exemplarily explained and should not constitute a limitation.
  • the terminal 100, the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103 in FIG. 4 above may be terminals such as smart phones and tablet computers.
  • terminals such as smart phones and tablet computers.
  • FIG. 1A For the schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal 100, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 1A.
  • the structure of the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103 can also refer to the terminal 100, and the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103 are not repeated here.
  • the user after the user triggers the opening of files such as pictures, videos, documents, etc., they can use sliding operations (such as three-finger sliding) on the display interface of the file objects such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.
  • the file object is sent to the nearest nearby device consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation. In this way, the operation steps for users to share file data can be simplified, and the efficiency of sharing file data with nearby devices can be improved.
  • the user can trigger to open the picture in the gallery application on the terminal 100, and then send the picture to the sliding direction consistent with the sliding operation and closer Nearby equipment.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 on the home screen.
  • the interface 510 displays a page with application icons.
  • the page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icons, stock application icons, computing Browser application icon, settings application icon 512A, mail application icon, Alipay application icon, Facebook application icon, browser application icon, gallery application icon 512B, music application icon 512C, video application icon, WeChat application icon 512D, Find my device Application icon 512E, etc.).
  • a page indicator is also displayed below the multiple application icons to indicate the positional relationship between the currently displayed page and other pages.
  • There are multiple tray icons for example, dial-up application icon, information application icon, contact application icon, camera application icon) below the page indicator, and the tray icon remains displayed when the page is switched.
  • the above-mentioned page may also include multiple application icons and page indicators.
  • the page indicator may not be a part of the page and exist alone.
  • the above-mentioned picture icon is also optional, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • a status bar 511 is displayed in the upper part of the interface 510.
  • the status bar 511 may include: one or more signal strength indicators of mobile communication signals (also called cellular signals), battery status indicators, and time indicators ,and many more. After the terminal turns on the Bluetooth function, the status bar 511 may also display a Bluetooth on indicator.
  • a navigation bar 516 is displayed below the tray icon.
  • the navigation bar 516 may include system navigation keys such as a return button 517, a home screen button 518, a call out task history button 519, and so on.
  • system navigation keys such as a return button 517, a home screen button 518, a call out task history button 519, and so on.
  • the terminal 100 may display the previous page of the current page.
  • the terminal 100 may display the main interface.
  • the terminal 100 can display the task recently opened by the user.
  • the naming of each navigation key can also be other, which is not limited in this application. Not limited to virtual keys, each navigation key in the navigation bar 516 can also be implemented as a physical key.
  • the navigation bar 516 is also optional, and the user can complete the functions of the navigation keys in the navigation bar 516 through other operations.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user acting on the gallery application icon 512B, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a gallery application interface 520 as shown in FIG. 5B.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the gallery application interface 520 includes one or more album options (for example, all photo albums 521, video albums 522, camera albums, screenshot catalog albums, WeChat albums, Weibo albums, etc.).
  • each album option has the name of the album and the number of photos and/or videos in the album.
  • all photo albums 521 include 2160 photos
  • video albums 522 include 6 videos.
  • the gallery application interface 520 also includes a new album control 523.
  • the new album control 523 can be used to trigger the creation of a new album in the gallery application interface 520.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user acting on the all photo albums 521, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display the album interface 530 as shown in FIG. 5C.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the title of the album interface 530 may be "All Photos”.
  • the album interface 530 includes thumbnails of one or more pictures (for example, thumbnails 531).
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user acting on the thumbnail 531, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a picture display interface 540 as shown in FIG. 5D.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the title of the picture display interface 540 may be "July 15, 2019".
  • the picture display interface 540 displays a picture 541 and a menu 547.
  • the menu 547 includes a share button 542, a favorite button 543, an edit button 544, a delete button 545, and a more button 546.
  • the share button 542 can be used to trigger the opening of the file sharing interface (refer to the file sharing interface 330 in FIG. 3C above).
  • the collection button 543 can be used to trigger the collection of the picture 541 to the picture collection folder.
  • the editing button 544 can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotation, trimming, adding filters, and blurring of the picture 541.
  • the delete button 545 can be used to trigger the deletion of the picture 541.
  • the more button 546 can be used to trigger opening more functions related to the picture 541.
  • the menu 547 is optional.
  • the menu 547 can be hidden in the picture display interface 540.
  • the user can click the picture 541 to hide the menu 547, and click the picture 541 again to display the menu 547, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 may receive a user's sliding operation on the picture display interface 540.
  • the sliding operation may be three fingers touching the touch screen.
  • the sliding operation may also be two-finger touch sliding, knuckle touch sliding, finger pressing sliding, and so on.
  • the starting position of the sliding operation can be anywhere on the picture display interface 540, for example, it can be at the position of the picture 541 in the picture display interface 540, or in other positions, without limitation.
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation can be determined by the start position and the end position of the sliding operation, and the track can be a curve or a straight line, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, and measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal 100 through the BLE angle of arrival (AoA).
  • the terminal 100 can determine the sliding direction (for example, the sliding direction is 90 degrees clockwise of the terminal 100) from the nearby devices (such as the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) according to the direction and position of the nearby devices, that is, the terminal 100 is directly right.
  • the receiving device for example, the receiving device is the terminal 103) with the same direction).
  • the direction of the receiving device relative to the terminal 100 and the sliding direction may have a certain error, that is, when the angle between the direction of the receiving device relative to the terminal 100 and the sliding direction is less than a specified angle threshold (for example, 15 degrees), it can be considered that the direction of the receiving device relative to the terminal 100 is consistent with the sliding direction.
  • a specified angle threshold for example, 15 degrees
  • the terminal 100 may display a prompt box 548 as shown in FIG. 5F for requesting the user to confirm whether to send the picture 541 to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the terminal 100 may display a prompt box 548.
  • the prompt box 548 is used to request the user to confirm whether to send the picture 541 to the receiving device.
  • the prompt box 548 includes a confirmation button 549A and a cancel button 549B.
  • the confirmation button 549A is used to trigger the terminal 100 to send the picture 541 to the receiving device.
  • the cancel button 549B is used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel sending the picture 541 to the receiving device.
  • the prompt box 548 may display the device name of the receiving device to allow the user to confirm whether the receiving device meets expectations.
  • the terminal 100 can display the device name of the terminal 103 (for example, the device name of the terminal 103 is "HUAWEI P30 Pro").
  • the prompt box 548 may display text information such as "Whether to send this picture to'HUAWEI P30 Pro'".
  • the prompt box 548 may also display the data size information of the picture 541 (for example, "total 8M"), which is used to prompt the user of the data size of the picture 541.
  • the terminal 100 may receive the user's operation (for example, clicking) on the confirm button 549A in the prompt box 548.
  • the terminal 100 may send a picture sharing request to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) via BLE, and the display is shown in Fig. 5G The progress bar 550 is shown.
  • the picture sharing request is used to request the receiving device to receive the picture 541 shared by the terminal 100.
  • the prompt box 548 displayed by the terminal 100 in FIG. 5F is optional.
  • the terminal 100 may also not display the prompt box 548 after determining the receiving device, without the user confirming on the terminal 100, directly through
  • the BLE sends a picture sharing request to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103), and displays a progress bar 550 as shown in FIG. 5G. In this way, as long as the user agrees to receive on the receiving device, the picture 541 can be directly sent to the receiving device.
  • the progress bar 550 described in FIG. 5G is optional, and the terminal 100 may not display the progress bar 550.
  • the terminal 100 may also receive the user's operation on the progress bar 550 and hide the progress bar 550.
  • the progress bar 550 may be hidden in the drop-down notification window of the terminal 100. If the user wants to To view the progress bar 550, the notification window can be retrieved to view the progress bar 550 by receiving a user's sliding operation on the status bar.
  • the display position or display manner of the progress bar 550 may be applicable to various progress bars mentioned in the subsequent embodiments, and will not be described in detail in the subsequent embodiments.
  • the progress bar 550 displayed on the terminal 100 may display text information 551 for prompting the user with information such as the name of the picture 541, the name of the receiving device, and the data size of the picture 541.
  • the text information 551 may be text information such as "picture "July 15, 2019” to be sent to "HUAWEI P30 Pro" (total 8M)".
  • the progress bar 550 may also include a progress bar 552 and a cancel button 553.
  • the progress bar 552 can be used to display the progress of the terminal 100 sending pictures 541.
  • the cancel button 553 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel the sending of the picture 541.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • a prompt box 560 may be displayed.
  • the prompt box 560 includes an accept button 561 and a reject button 562.
  • the receiving button 561 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to receive the picture 541 sent by the device 100.
  • the reject button 562 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to reject the picture 541 sent by the device 100.
  • the receiving device may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the receiving button 561 by the user, and in response to the operation, the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) may send a receiving response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 can directly connect via Wi-Fi (for example, wireless fidelity peer to peer (Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, ultra-wideband (UWB)
  • Wi-Fi P2P wireless fidelity peer to peer
  • Wi-Fi softAP for example, Wi-Fi softAP
  • UWB ultra-wideband
  • the picture 541 is sent to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) with other communication technologies.
  • the progress displayed by the progress bar 552 on the terminal 100 will change with the transmission process, for example, the terminal 100 still
  • the progress displayed on the progress bar 552 is "0%”
  • the progress displayed on the progress bar 552 is "100%”.
  • the receiving device is the terminal 103.
  • the terminal 103 may directly display the picture 563, or display the picture 563 after confirmation by the user.
  • the picture 563 displayed on the terminal 103 comes from the terminal 100 and is the same picture file as the picture 541 displayed on the terminal 100.
  • the size of the picture 563 displayed on the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) is adaptively adjusted according to the display screen of the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the aforementioned prompt box 560 is optional.
  • the receiving device may display a prompt box 560 when receiving the data (such as picture) sharing request of the first file object (such as a picture) sent by the terminal 100, and receive the user's confirmation operation on the receiving button 561, and establish a file with the receiving device Transmission connection (such as Wi-Fi P2P, Wi-Fi softAP, UWB, etc.). If the receiving device receives the second file object (such as a picture) sent by the terminal 100 again after a period of time (such as 15 seconds), the receiving device may not display the prompt box 560, and the receiving device 100 directly sends it without confirmation.
  • the second file object (such as pictures, videos, documents).
  • the text description of the prompt box 560 displayed on the receiving device may be applicable to the progress bar displayed on the receiving device mentioned in the subsequent embodiments. For the parts not detailed in the subsequent embodiments, please refer to this Place.
  • the receiving device may refuse to receive the image data sent by the device 100 in response to a user operation.
  • the receiving device is a terminal 103.
  • the terminal 103 can receive an operation (for example, a click) of the rejection button 562 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 103 can send a rejection response to the terminal 100.
  • an operation for example, a click
  • the terminal 100 may update the display prompt information 555 in the progress bar 550.
  • the prompt message 555 may be "'HUAWEI P30 Pro' has refused to receive the pictures you sent (8M in total)".
  • the video file is sent to and is consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the nearest nearby device in that direction is consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the terminal 100 may display a gallery application interface 610.
  • the gallery application interface 610 includes one or more album options (for example, all photo albums 611, video albums 612, camera albums, screenshot catalog albums, WeChat albums, Weibo albums, etc.) and a new album control 613 Wait.
  • album options for example, all photo albums 611, video albums 612, camera albums, screenshot catalog albums, WeChat albums, Weibo albums, etc.
  • a new album control 613 Wait for example, all photo albums 611, video albums 612, camera albums, screenshot catalog albums, WeChat albums, Weibo albums, etc.
  • the gallery application interface 610 shown in FIG. 6A is the same as the gallery application interface 520 shown in FIG. 5B. Therefore, the text description for the gallery application interface 520 in FIG. 5B is also applicable to the gallery application interface in FIG. 6A 610, I won't repeat it here.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user on the video album 612, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display the video album interface 620 as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the title of the video album interface 620 may be "Video".
  • the video album interface 620 includes one or more video file options (for example, video file options 621).
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) most used by the user for the video file option 621, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a video display interface 630 as shown in FIG. 6C.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the title of the video display interface 630 may be "Travel", that is, the title of the video file is “Travel”.
  • the video display interface 630 displays a video file 631, a play button 638, and a menu 637.
  • the play button 638 can be used to trigger the video file 631 to be played.
  • the menu 637 includes a share button 632, a favorite button 633, an edit button 634, a delete button 645, and a more button 646.
  • the share button 642 can be used to trigger the opening of the file sharing interface (refer to the file sharing interface 330 in FIG. 3C).
  • the collection button 633 can be used to trigger the collection of the video file 631 to the video collection folder.
  • the edit button 634 can be used to trigger editing functions such as cropping of the video screen 631.
  • the delete button 635 can be used to trigger the deletion of the video file 631.
  • the more button 636 can be used to trigger opening more functions related to the video file 631.
  • the menu 637 is optional.
  • the menu 637 can be hidden in the video display interface 630.
  • the user can click the video file 631 to hide the menu 637, and click the video file 631 again to display the menu 637, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 may receive a user's sliding operation on the video display interface 630.
  • the sliding operation may be three fingers triggering a touch screen sliding.
  • the starting position of the sliding operation can be any position of the picture display interface 540, and is not limited.
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation can be determined by the start position and the end position of the sliding operation, and the track can be a curve or a straight line, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, and measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal 100 through BLE AoA.
  • the terminal 100 can determine the sliding direction (for example, the sliding direction is 90 degrees clockwise of the terminal 100) from the nearby devices (such as the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) according to the direction and position of the nearby devices, that is, the terminal 100 is directly right.
  • the receiving device for example, the receiving device is the terminal 103) with the same direction).
  • the terminal 100 may display a prompt box 640 as shown in FIG. 6E for requesting the user to confirm whether to send the video file 631 to the receiving device determined by the terminal 100 (for example, the receiving device is the terminal 103).
  • the terminal 100 may output a prompt box 640.
  • the prompt box 640 is used to request the user to confirm whether to send the video file 631 to the receiving device.
  • the prompt box 640 includes a confirmation button 641 and a cancel button 642.
  • the confirmation button 641 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to send the video file 641 to the receiving device.
  • the cancel button 642 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel sending the video file 631 to the receiving device.
  • the prompt box 640 may display the device name of the receiving device, which is used to allow the user to confirm whether the receiving device meets expectations.
  • the terminal 100 can display the device name of the terminal 103 (for example, the device name of the terminal 103 is "HUAWEI P30 Pro").
  • the prompt box 640 may display text information such as "Whether to send this video to'HUAWEI P30 Pro'".
  • the prompt box 640 may also display the size information of the video file 631 (for example, "82M" in total), which is used to prompt the user of the data size of the video file 631.
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's operation (for example, clicking) on the confirmation button 641 in the prompt box 640.
  • the terminal 100 can send a video sharing request to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) via BLE, and the display is shown in FIG. 6F The progress bar 650 is shown.
  • the video sharing request is used to request the receiving device to receive the video file 631 shared by the terminal 100.
  • the prompt box 640 displayed by the terminal 100 in FIG. 6E is optional.
  • the terminal 100 may also not display the prompt box 640 after determining the receiving device, without the user confirming on the terminal 100, directly through
  • the BLE sends a video sharing request to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103), and displays a progress bar 650 as shown in FIG. 6F. In this way, as long as the user agrees to receive on the receiving device, the video file 631 can be directly sent to the receiving device.
  • the progress bar 650 may display information such as the name of the video file 631, the name of the receiving device, and the data size of the video file 631.
  • the progress bar 650 displays text information such as "the video file "travel” is to be sent to "HUAWEI P30 Pro" (82M in total)".
  • the progress bar 650 may also include a progress bar 652 and a cancel button 653.
  • the progress bar 652 can be used to display the progress of the terminal 100 sending the video file 631.
  • the cancel button 653 can be used to trigger the cancellation of sending the video file 631.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • a prompt box 660 may be displayed.
  • the prompt box 660 includes a receiving button 661 and a reject button 662.
  • the receiving button 661 can be used to trigger the receiving device 100 to send the video file 631.
  • the rejection button 662 can be used to trigger the rejection of the video file 631 sent by the receiving device 100.
  • the receiving device may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the receiving button 661 by the user, and in response to the operation, the receiving device may send a receiving response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may send the video file 631 to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) through communication technologies such as Wi-Fi direct connection (for example, Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, and UWB.
  • Wi-Fi direct connection for example, Wi-Fi P2P
  • Wi-Fi softAP for example, Wi-Fi softAP
  • UWB User-Fi
  • the receiving device is the terminal 103.
  • the terminal 103 may directly display the video file 663, or display the video file 663 after confirmation by the user.
  • the video file 663 displayed on the terminal 103 comes from the terminal 100, and is the same video file as the video file 631 displayed on the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 103 may display a play button 664 on the video file 663, and the play button 664 is used to trigger the terminal 103 to play the video file 663.
  • the aforementioned prompt box 660 is optional.
  • the receiving device may display a prompt box 560 when receiving the data (such as video file) sharing request of the first file object (such as a video file) sent by the terminal 100, and receive the user's confirmation operation on the receiving button 561, and communicate with the receiving device Establish file transfer connection (such as Wi-Fi P2P, Wi-Fi softAP, UWB, etc.). If the receiving device receives the second file object (such as a video file) sent by the terminal 100 again after a period of time (such as 15 seconds), the receiving device may not display the prompt box 560, and the receiving device 100 directly does not need to be confirmed by the user. The second file object sent (such as a video file).
  • the user can first trigger the terminal 100 to measure and display the direction and position of nearby devices on the display interface of the files such as pictures, videos, and documents. Then, the user can drag pictures, videos, documents and other files to the location of nearby devices through sliding operations to send files such as pictures, videos, and documents to nearby devices. In this way, the operation steps for users to share file data can be simplified, and the efficiency of file data sharing can be improved.
  • the user can first trigger the terminal 100 to display the direction of one or more nearby devices on the touch screen on the display interface of the picture file position. Then, the user can drag the picture file on the touch screen to the location of the nearby device by sliding operation to send the picture to the nearby device.
  • the terminal 100 may display a picture display interface 710.
  • the title of the picture display interface 710 may be "July 15, 2019".
  • the picture display interface 710 displays a picture 711 and a menu 717.
  • the menu 717 includes a share button 712, a favorite button 713, an edit button 714, a delete button 715, and a more button 716.
  • the share button 712 can be used to trigger the opening of the file sharing interface (refer to the file sharing interface 330 in FIG. 3C).
  • the favorite button 713 can be used to trigger the favorite picture 711 to the picture favorite folder.
  • the editing button 714 can be used to trigger editing functions such as rotation, trimming, adding filters, and blurring of the picture 711.
  • the delete button 715 can be used to trigger the deletion of the picture 716.
  • the more button 716 can be used to trigger opening more functions related to the picture 711.
  • the menu 717 is optional.
  • the menu 717 can be hidden in the picture display interface 710.
  • the user can click the picture 711 to hide the menu 717, and click the picture 711 again to display the menu 717, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 may receive a user's touch operation on the picture 711.
  • the touch operation may be a user's finger pressing (for example, a three-finger long press) the picture 711. It is not limited to a three-finger long press, and may also be a two-finger long press, Single finger long press, this application is not limited here, etc.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, search for nearby devices through BLE, and measure the directional position (including direction and distance) of nearby devices through BLE AoA.
  • the terminal 100 when the terminal 100 three-finger presses the picture 711, the picture 711 can be zoomed out and displayed.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, search for nearby devices through BLE, and measure the direction of nearby devices through BLE AoA Location (including direction and distance).
  • the terminal 100 may display a search prompt 721 for prompting the user that the terminal 100 is currently searching for nearby devices.
  • the search prompt 721 may be text information such as "searching for nearby devices", but is not limited to this, and the search prompt 721 may also be information such as icons.
  • nearby devices may include terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103.
  • the device name of the terminal 101 may be "Verseau”
  • the device name of the terminal 102 may be "Daniel”
  • the device name of the terminal 103 may be "HUAWEI P30 Pro”.
  • the directional positions of nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) measured by terminal 100 can refer to the positional relationship between terminal 100 and nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) shown in FIG. 4 as an example.
  • the terminal 101 may be 0.8 m in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the terminal 100
  • the terminal 102 may be 1.2 m in a 45 degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100
  • the terminal 103 may be 0.5 m in a 90 degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may display its own location mark 725, the location mark 722 of the terminal 101, the location mark 723 of the terminal 102, and the location mark 724 of the terminal 103 on the picture display interface 710.
  • the positional relationship between the position mark 725 of the terminal 100 and the position mark of nearby devices may refer to the positional relationship between the terminal 100 and nearby devices.
  • each position marker position marker 722, position marker 723, position marker 724, and position marker 725) can be scaled according to a certain ratio according to the distance between the terminal 100 and nearby devices.
  • the direction of the position markers (position marker 723, position marker 724, and position marker 725) of the nearby device relative to the position marker 725 is the same as the direction of the nearby device relative to the terminal 100.
  • the zoom ratio can be 1:40. Since the terminal 101 is 0.8 m in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the terminal 100, the position mark 722 may be 2 cm in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the position mark 725. Since the terminal 102 is 1.2 m in the 45-degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100, the position mark 723 may be 3 cm in the 45-degree clockwise direction of the position mark 725. Since the terminal 103 is 0.5 m in the clockwise direction of 45 degrees of the terminal 100, the position mark 724 may be 1.25 cm in the clockwise direction of 90 degrees of the position mark 725. The above examples are only used to explain the application and are not limited here.
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's sliding operation on the picture 711.
  • the sliding operation may be that the user's finger presses (for example, three fingers presses and presses) the picture 711 to slide 90 degrees clockwise of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 can determine the receiving device of the picture 711 according to the middle sliding end position of the sliding operation. For example, when the middle sliding end position of the sliding operation is at the position mark 724, since the device corresponding to the position mark 724 is the terminal 103, the terminal 100 can determine that the receiving device is the terminal 103.
  • the user's operation of selecting the receiving device is not limited to the sliding operation on the picture 711 shown in FIG. 7C and FIG. 7D, and may also be other selection operations, which is not limited.
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's click operation on the position mark 724 in FIG. 7C.
  • the terminal 100 can determine that the receiving device is the terminal 103 corresponding to the location mark 724.
  • the terminal 100 may send a picture sharing request to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) via BLE, and display a progress bar 730 as shown in FIG. 7E.
  • the picture sharing request is used to request the receiving device to receive the picture 711 shared by the terminal 100.
  • the progress bar 730 displayed on the terminal 100 may display text information 731 for prompting the user with information such as the name of the picture 711, the name of the receiving device, and the data size of the picture 711.
  • the text information 731 may be "picture'July 15, 2019' to be sent to'HUAWEI P30 Pro' (total 8M)".
  • the progress bar 730 may also include a progress bar 732 and a cancel button 733. Wherein, the progress bar 732 can be used to display the progress of the terminal 100 sending the picture 711.
  • the cancel button 733 can be used to trigger the cancellation of sending the picture 711.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • a prompt box 740 may be displayed.
  • the prompt box 740 includes a receiving button 741 and a reject button 742.
  • the receiving button 741 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to receive the picture 711 sent by the terminal 100.
  • the rejection button 742 can be used to trigger the rejection of the picture 711 sent by the device 100.
  • the receiving device may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the receiving button 741 by the user, and in response to the operation, the receiving device may send a receiving response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 can send the picture 711 to the receiving device (for example, Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, ultra-wideband (UWB) and other communication technologies.
  • the receiving device for example, Wi-Fi P2P
  • Wi-Fi softAP for example, Wi-Fi softAP
  • UWB ultra-wideband
  • Terminal 103 the progress displayed on the progress bar 732 on the terminal 100 will change with the transmission process. For example, the progress displayed on the progress bar 732 when the terminal 100 has not yet started to transmit the picture 711 is " 0%", the progress displayed on the progress bar 732 when the transfer is completed is "100%".
  • the receiving device is the terminal 103.
  • the terminal 103 may directly display the picture 743, or display the picture 743 after confirmation by the user.
  • the picture 743 displayed on the terminal 103 comes from the terminal 100 and is the same picture file as the picture 711 displayed on the terminal 100.
  • the size of the picture 743 displayed on the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) is adaptively adjusted according to the display screen of the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the user can slide the picture or video on the display interface of the picture, video, document and other files in the third-party application (for example, WeChat application, QQ application) Wait for the file to be sent to the nearest nearby device consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the third-party application for example, WeChat application, QQ application
  • the user can save the file in the third-party application to the local terminal without triggering, and then exit the third-party application to trigger the sharing of the file data in the local folder of the terminal to nearby devices, which simplifies the operation steps for the user to share the file data in the third-party application. Improve the efficiency of sharing file data to nearby devices.
  • the third-party application is a WeChat application as an example to exemplarily illustrate that the user slides on the display interface of pictures, videos, documents and other files in the third-party application. Operation (for example, three-finger swipe), sending the file such as the picture or video to the nearest nearby device consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 on the home screen.
  • the interface 510 displays a page with application icons.
  • the page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icons, stock application icons, computing Browser application icon, settings application icon 512A, mail application icon, Alipay application icon, Facebook application icon, browser application icon, gallery application icon 512B, music application icon 512C, video application icon, WeChat application icon 512D, Find my device Application icon 512E, etc.).
  • application icons for example, weather application icons, stock application icons, computing Browser application icon, settings application icon 512A, mail application icon, Alipay application icon, Facebook application icon, browser application icon, gallery application icon 512B, music application icon 512C, video application icon, WeChat application icon 512D, Find my device Application icon 512E, etc.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user acting on the WeChat application icon 512D, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display the WeChat application interface 810 as shown in FIG. 8B.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the WeChat application interface 810 includes a message browsing page 811 and a menu 813.
  • the menu 813 includes a WeChat control 814, a contact control 815, a discovery control 816, and a my control 817.
  • the WeChat control 814 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to display the message browsing page 811.
  • the contact control 815 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display a page that includes multiple WeChat contact options.
  • the discovery control 816 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display a page including functional controls such as Moments of Friends and a scan.
  • the my control 817 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display a page containing the personal information of the WeChat user and other information.
  • the message browsing page 811 includes one or more message options (for example, the message option 812 of the contact "MAC”, the message option of the contact “Kate”, the message option of the email reminder, the message option of the subscription number, the contact The message option of the group “food group”, the message option of WeChat sports, the message option of the contact group “fitness group”).
  • message options for example, the message option 812 of the contact "MAC", the message option of the contact “Kate”, the message option of the email reminder, the message option of the subscription number, the contact The message option of the group “food group”, the message option of WeChat sports, the message option of the contact group “fitness group”).
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's operation on the message option 812, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 can display a chat interface 820 as shown in FIG. 8C.
  • the chat interface 820 displays a contact name (for example, "MAC"), a contact avatar 821, a chat message 822, a voice input control 823, a text input box 824, an expression control 825, and more function controls. 826.
  • the chat message 822 may be files such as pictures, videos, documents, etc. In FIG. 8C, only picture files are used as an example for illustration, which should not constitute a limitation.
  • the voice input control 823 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display the text input box 824 as a voice input box.
  • the text input box 824 can be used to display text or emoticons input by the user.
  • the emoticon control 825 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display one or more sendable emoticon pictures.
  • the more function control 826 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display more WeChat chat function controls (for example, picture sending control, video sending control, photo sending control, etc.).
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the chat message 822 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a picture display interface 830 as shown in FIG. 8D.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the picture display interface 830 includes a picture 831 and a save control 832.
  • the save control 832 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to save the picture 831 to a local folder.
  • the terminal 100 may receive a sliding operation performed by the user on the picture display interface 830.
  • the sliding operation may be a sliding operation of the user's three fingers touching the touch screen.
  • the starting position of the sliding operation can be anywhere on the picture display interface 830, and is not limited.
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation can be determined by the start position and the end position of the sliding operation, and the trajectory can be curved or straight, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, and measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal 100 through BLE AoA.
  • the terminal 100 can determine the sliding direction (for example, the sliding direction is 90 degrees clockwise of the terminal 100) from the nearby devices (such as the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) according to the direction and position of the nearby devices, that is, the terminal 100 is directly right.
  • the receiving device for example, the receiving device is the terminal 103) with the same direction).
  • the terminal 100 After the terminal 100 determines the receiving device, it can send a picture sharing request to the receiving device (such as the terminal 103) via BLE, and display a prompt box 840 as shown in FIG. 8E for requesting the user to confirm whether to send the picture 831 to the receiving device (For example, terminal 103).
  • the terminal 100 may output a prompt box 840.
  • the prompt box 840 is used to request the user to confirm whether to send the picture 831 to the receiving device.
  • the prompt box 840 includes a confirmation button 841 and a cancel button 842.
  • the confirmation button 841 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to send the picture 831 to the receiving device.
  • the cancel button 842 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel sending the picture 831 to the receiving device.
  • the prompt box 840 may display the device name of the receiving device to allow the user to confirm whether the receiving device meets expectations.
  • the terminal 100 can display the device name of the terminal 103 (for example, the device name of the terminal 103 is "HUAWEI P30 Pro").
  • the prompt box 840 may display text information such as "Whether to send this picture to'HUAWEI P30 Pro'".
  • the prompt box 840 may also display the data size information of the picture 831 (for example, "total 8M"), which is used to prompt the user of the data size of the picture 831.
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's operation (for example, clicking) on the confirmation button 841 in the prompt box 840.
  • the terminal 100 can send a picture sharing request to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) via BLE, and the display is shown in FIG. 8F The progress bar 850 is shown.
  • the picture sharing request is used to request the receiving device to receive the picture 831 shared by the terminal 100.
  • the prompt box 840 displayed by the terminal 100 in FIG. 8E is optional.
  • the terminal 100 may also not display the prompt box 840 after determining the receiving device.
  • the user does not need to confirm on the terminal 100.
  • the BLE sends a picture sharing request to the receiving device (such as the terminal 103), and displays a progress bar 850 as shown in FIG. 8E. In this way, as long as the user agrees to receive on the receiving device, the picture 831 can be directly sent to the receiving device.
  • the progress bar 850 displayed on the terminal 100 may display text information 851 for prompting information such as the name of the receiving device and the data size of the picture 831.
  • the text information 831 may be text information such as "picture to be sent to "HUAWEI P30 Pro" (total 8M)".
  • the progress bar 850 may also include a progress bar 852 and a cancel button 853.
  • the progress bar 852 can be used to display the progress of the terminal 100 sending pictures 831.
  • the cancel button 853 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel the sending of the picture 831.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • a prompt box 840 may be displayed.
  • the prompt box 840 has a receiving button 841 and a reject button 842.
  • the receiving button 84 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to receive the picture 831 sent by the device 100.
  • the reject button 842 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to reject the picture 831 sent by the device 100.
  • the receiving device may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the receiving button 841 by the user, and in response to the operation, the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) may send a receiving response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may first save the picture 831 to the local folder of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 transmits the picture 831 to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) through communication technologies such as Wi-Fi Direct (Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, and ultra-wideband (UWB).
  • Wi-Fi P2P Wi-Fi Direct
  • Wi-Fi softAP Wi-Fi softAP
  • UWB ultra-wideband
  • the receiving device is the terminal 103.
  • the terminal 103 may directly display the picture 863, or display the picture 861 after confirmation by the user.
  • the picture 863 displayed on the terminal 103 comes from the terminal 100 and is the same picture file as the picture 831 displayed on the terminal 100.
  • the size of the picture 863 displayed on the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103) is adaptively adjusted according to the display screen of the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the user can trigger the terminal 100 to measure and display the direction and position (including direction and distance) of nearby devices after selecting files such as pictures, videos, and documents to be shared. Then, the user can select a receiving device of the file from nearby devices to trigger the terminal 100 to send the file selected by the user to the receiving device. In this way, the user can know the location of the nearby device when sharing the file data with the nearby device through the terminal 100, which is convenient for the user to determine the receiving device of the file data.
  • the user can select the video file to be shared on the data sharing interface (such as the "Huawei Sharing" interface), and then trigger the terminal 100 to measure and Display the direction and location of one or more nearby devices. Then, the user can select the receiving device of the file from nearby devices to trigger the terminal 100 to send the file data selected by the user to the receiving device.
  • the data sharing interface such as the "Huawei Sharing" interface
  • “Huawei Share” can support users to share data to devices near the terminal 100.
  • Nearby devices may include nearby printers, nearby projectors, nearby displays, etc., as well as nearby mobile phones, nearby tablet computers, nearby personal computers, and the like.
  • Turning on “Huawei Sharing” can mean turning on one or more of WLAN or Bluetooth.
  • the electronic device can discover devices near the terminal 100 through communication technologies such as Bluetooth, Wi-Fi direct connection (such as Wi-Fi p2p), Wi-Fi softAP, and Wi-Fi LAN.
  • the "Huawei Share” function may also have other names, such as “Instant Share", etc., which are not limited here.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 on the home screen.
  • the interface 510 displays a page with application icons.
  • the page includes multiple application icons (for example, weather application icons, stock application icons, computing Browser application icon, settings application icon 512A, mail application icon, Alipay application icon, Facebook application icon, browser application icon, gallery application icon 512B, music application icon 512C, video application icon, WeChat application icon 512D, Find my device Application icon 512E, etc.).
  • application icons for example, weather application icons, stock application icons, computing Browser application icon, settings application icon 512A, mail application icon, Alipay application icon, Facebook application icon, browser application icon, gallery application icon 512B, music application icon 512C, video application icon, WeChat application icon 512D, Find my device Application icon 512E, etc.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) performed by the user on the setting application icon 512A, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display the setting application interface 910 as shown in FIG. 9B.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the setting application interface 910 includes one or more setting items (for example, wireless and network device items, device connection setting items 911, application and notification setting items, battery setting items, display setting items, sound Setting items, storage setting items, security and privacy setting items, user and account setting items, etc.).
  • setting items for example, wireless and network device items, device connection setting items 911, application and notification setting items, battery setting items, display setting items, sound Setting items, storage setting items, security and privacy setting items, user and account setting items, etc.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the device connection setting item 911 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a device connection setting interface 920 as shown in FIG. 9C.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the device connection setting interface 920 includes one or more options (for example, Bluetooth option, NFC option, Huawei Beam option, Huawei Share option 921, mobile screen projection option, USB option, printing option) ,and many more).
  • options for example, Bluetooth option, NFC option, Huawei Beam option, Huawei Share option 921, mobile screen projection option, USB option, printing option.
  • the terminal 1100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user acting on the Huawei sharing option 921, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a Huawei sharing interface 930 as shown in FIG. 9D.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the Huawei sharing interface 930 includes user information entry 931, visibility entry 934, received file entry 936, shared space entry 937, file sending control 938A, multicast control 938B, printing control 938C, and sharing to computer Control 938D, One Touch Control 938E.
  • the user information entry 931 is used to display the user avatar 932, the user name 933 (for example, "An Qian"), and the device name (for example, "HUAWEI Mate 20 Pro").
  • the visibility entry 934 includes a visibility switch control 935 for triggering the terminal 100 to be discovered by other devices.
  • the received file entry 936 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to display the file received through the "Huawei Share" function.
  • the shared control entry 937 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display file data shared by other devices or users.
  • the file sending control 938A can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display a file selection interface for the user to select file data to be sent.
  • the multicast control 938B can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to simultaneously send file data to multiple nearby devices.
  • the print control 938C can be used to trigger 100 to send a file to a nearby printer for printing.
  • the share to computer control 938D can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to send file data to the "Huawei Share" client on the computer.
  • the One Touch Control 938E can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to send file data to other devices via NFC.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the file sending control 938A by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a file selection interface 940 as shown in FIG. 9E.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the title of the file selection interface 940 may be "Select File”.
  • the file selection interface 940 may include one or more data type options (for example, picture type option 941, video type option 942, application type option 943, file type option 944) display area 945 and sending control 949.
  • the picture type option 941 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display one or more picture folders in the display area 945 (for example, the "camera” folder 946, the “mobile Taobao” folder, the "screenshot directory” folder, and the “Favorites” folder).
  • the “camera” folder 946 includes a selected picture prompt 947 and a folder selection box 948.
  • the selected picture prompt 947 can be used to remind the user of the number of pictures selected in the "camera” folder 946.
  • the folder selection box 948 can be used to trigger the selection of all photos in the "camera” folder 946.
  • the video type option 942 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display one or more video options in the display area 945.
  • the application option 943 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display one or more application data options in the display area 945.
  • the file option 944 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display one or more other files (such as documents, tables, slides, etc.) in the display area 945.
  • the terminal 100 may display one or more video options in the display area 945 (for example, " "Gourmet Course” video option 952, “Walk by the sea” video option 953, “Weekend Hiking” video option 954, "Travel” video option 955, "Sunset” video option 956, “Chao Lu” video option 957, etc.).
  • the terminal 100 may also display a selection box 951 in the display area 945 for triggering the terminal 100 to select all video options in the display area 945.
  • the terminal 100 can receive a user's operation (for example, a single click) for operating the "travel" video option 955 and the "sunset” video option 956, and in response to this operation, the terminal 100 can select the "travel" video option 955 and the "sunset” video option 956 all display a mark 958 as shown in FIG. 9G, which is used to remind the user that the video file corresponding to the "travel" video option 955 and the video file corresponding to the "sunset” video option 956 are currently selected.
  • a user's operation for example, a single click
  • the terminal 100 may select the file data in the sending control 949 Display the data size of the file to be sent (for example, 122MB).
  • the terminal 100 can receive an operation (for example, a click) of the sending control 949 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 can display a file sending interface 960 as shown in FIG. 9H. At the same time, the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, search for nearby devices through BLE, and measure the direction and position (including direction and distance) of nearby devices through BLE AoA.
  • an operation for example, a click
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, search for nearby devices through BLE, and measure the direction and position (including direction and distance) of nearby devices through BLE AoA.
  • the file sending interface 960 may include a nearby device option 962, a contact option 963, and a radar chart 970.
  • the terminal 100 After the terminal 100 searches for nearby devices and measures the directional positions of the nearby devices, the terminal 100 may display the directional positions of the nearby devices relative to the terminal 100 in the radar chart 970.
  • nearby devices may include terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103.
  • the device name of the terminal 101 may be "Verseau"
  • the device name of the terminal 102 may be "Daniel”
  • the device name of the terminal 103 may be "HUAWEI P30 Pro".
  • the directional positions of nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) measured by terminal 100 can refer to the positional relationship between terminal 100 and nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) shown in FIG. 4 as an example.
  • the terminal 101 may be 0.8 m in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the terminal 100
  • the terminal 102 may be 1.2 m in a 45 degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100
  • the terminal 103 may be 0.5 m in a 90 degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 can display its own location mark 971, the location mark 972 of the terminal 101, the location mark 973 of the terminal 102, and the location mark 974 of the terminal 103 on the radar chart 970.
  • the positional relationship between the location mark 971 of the terminal 100 and the location mark of nearby devices may refer to the positional relationship between the terminal 100 and nearby devices.
  • the distance between the position markers can be scaled according to the distance between the terminal 100 and nearby devices according to a certain ratio.
  • the direction of the position markers (position marker 972, position marker 973, and position marker 974) of the nearby device relative to the position marker 971 is the same as the direction of the nearby device relative to the terminal 100.
  • the zoom ratio can be 1:40. Since the terminal 101 is 0.8 m in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the terminal 100, the position mark 972 may be 2 cm in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the position mark 961. Since the terminal 102 is 1.2 m in the 45-degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100, the position mark 973 may be 3 cm in the 45-degree clockwise direction of the position mark 971. Since the terminal 103 is at 0.5 m in the 45-degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100, the position mark 974 may be 1.25 cm in the 90-degree clockwise direction of the position mark 971.
  • the above examples are only used to explain the application and are not limited here.
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's operation on the location mark of a nearby device (for example, the user clicks on the location mark 974). In response to this operation, the terminal 100 can determine the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103), and send a picture sharing request to The receiving device (for example, the terminal 103), and displays a progress bar 980 as shown in FIG. 9I.
  • the data sharing request is used to request the receiving device to receive the file data shared by the terminal 100.
  • the progress bar 980 displayed on the terminal 100 may display text information 981 for prompting the user with information such as the name of the selected file data, the name of the receiving device, and the data size of the selected file data.
  • the text information may be "video files "travel” and “sunset” to be sent to "HUAWEI P30 Pro" (122M in total)".
  • the progress bar 980 may also include a progress bar 982 and a cancel button 983.
  • the progress bar 982 can be used to display the progress of the terminal 100 sending selected file data (for example, the video file corresponding to the "travel" video option 955 and the video file corresponding to the "sunset” video option 956).
  • the cancel button 983 can be used to trigger the cancellation of the transmission of the selected file data.
  • the receiving device may be a terminal 103.
  • a prompt box 990 may be displayed.
  • the prompt box 990 includes a receiving button 991 and a reject button 992.
  • the receiving button 991 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to receive the file data sent by the terminal 100.
  • the reject button 992 can be used to trigger the terminal 103 to reject the file data sent by the terminal 100.
  • the receiving device may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the receiving button 991 by the user, and in response to the operation, the receiving device may send a receiving response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 can send the file data selected by the user (for example, Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, ultra-wideband (UWB) and other communication technologies.
  • the video file corresponding to the "travel" video option 955 and the video file corresponding to the "sunset" video option 956 are given to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the progress displayed on the progress bar 982 on the terminal 100 will change with the transmission process. For example, the progress displayed on the progress bar 982 when the terminal 100 has not yet started to transmit the file data is " 0%", the progress displayed on the progress bar 982 when the transfer is complete is "100%".
  • the receiving device is the terminal 103.
  • the terminal 100 sends the file data selected by the user (for example, the video file corresponding to the "travel" video option 955 and the video file corresponding to the "sunset” video option 956) to the terminal 103
  • the terminal 103 can directly display the "travel" video option 993 And "Sunset” video option 994, or, after user confirmation, it will be displayed.
  • the video file corresponding to the "travel" video option 993 displayed on the terminal 103 originates from the terminal 100, and the video file corresponding to the "travel” video option 955 on the terminal 100 is the same video file.
  • the video file corresponding to the "sunset” video option 994 displayed on the terminal 103 comes from the terminal 100, and the video file corresponding to the "sunset” video option 956 on the terminal 100 is the same video file.
  • the operation of triggering the terminal 100 to display the Huawei sharing interface 930 shown in FIG. 9D is not limited to the operation of the Huawei sharing option 921 in the device connection setting interface 920 shown in FIG. 9C.
  • the terminal 100 may also In response to the user's operation on the main screen, the menu window is called up, and the menu window includes a switch control with the Huawei sharing function. In response to the user's operation on the switch control, the terminal 100 displays the Huawei sharing interface 930 shown in FIG. 9D. In this way, it helps to simplify the user's operation steps for sending file data to nearby devices.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 of the main screen.
  • the terminal 100 may receive a sliding operation (for example, sliding down) of the user on the status bar 511, and in response to the sliding operation, the terminal 100 may display a menu window 1010 as shown in FIG. 10B.
  • the menu window 1010 can display switch controls with some functions (for example, wireless local area network (WLAN) switch control, Bluetooth switch control, flashlight switch control, bell switch control, automatic rotary switch control, Huawei Share switch control 1011, etc.).
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a long press) of the Huawei sharing switch control 1011 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display the Huawei sharing interface 930 as shown in FIG. 10D.
  • the Huawei sharing interface 930 shown in FIG. 10D is the same as the Huawei sharing interface 930 shown in FIG. 9D. Therefore, for the text description of the Huawei sharing interface 930, you can refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9D, which will not be repeated here. .
  • the terminal 100 can not only share the file data selected by the user to nearby devices through short-range communication technology, but also send the file data selected by the user to the device of the contact in the Huawei sharing application via the Internet. . In this way, it is convenient for the user to choose whether to share data to nearby devices through the near field communication technology or to send to the contact's device through the Internet at an unlimited distance, which simplifies the user's operation of simultaneously sharing data to nearby devices and contacts.
  • the terminal 100 displays a file sending interface 960.
  • a file sending interface 960 For the text description of the file sending interface 960, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9H, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal 100 can receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the contact option 963 in the file sending interface 960 by the user. In response to this operation, the terminal 100 can update the display area of the radar chart 970 to be displayed as a contact as shown in FIG. 10F Listing 1020.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the contact list 1020 includes one or more contacts (for example, “Wei Ying”, “Jiang Cheng”, “Andy”, “Anna”, “Bob”, “Britney”, etc. Etc.) option.
  • the device corresponding to the one or more contact options has a user account of the same type of client (for example, a Huawei account).
  • each contact's option displays the contact's user name and device model.
  • the user name of the contact displayed on the contact option 1021 is "Wei Ying”
  • the device model is "HUAWEI P30 Pro".
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation performed by the user on the contact option 1021, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may send the file data selected by the user to the device corresponding to the contact option 1021.
  • the terminal 100 may display a progress box 1022 during the process of sending file data to the device corresponding to the contact option 1021 to prompt the user of the file sending progress.
  • the terminal 100 can measure the direction and position of nearby devices through BLE AoA technology , And display the directional position of the accessory device relative to the terminal 100 on the touch screen. In this way, it can help users find nearby accessory devices and improve user experience.
  • the accessory devices of the terminal 100 such as Bluetooth headsets, Bluetooth speakers, etc.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 of the main screen.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) performed by the user to find the my device application 512E, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display an application interface 1110 as shown in FIG. 11B.
  • the application interface 1110 may include a map 1120, a location refresh control 1111, one or more device options (for example, a device option 1112, and an accessory device option 1113).
  • the map 1120 includes the location mark 1121 of the terminal 100 and the location mark of one or more accessory devices.
  • the device corresponding to the device option 1112 may be a mobile phone, and its device name may be "HUAWEI P30".
  • the device corresponding to this device option 1113 can be a Bluetooth headset, and its device name can be "HUAWEI Free Buds 2".
  • the map 1120 may include the location mark of the terminal 100 (for example, the location mark 1121) and the location of one or more other devices (for example, the location mark 1122, the location mark 1123).
  • the location mark 1121 may be used to indicate the current location of the terminal 100 on the map 1120. Since the mobile phone "HUAWEI P30" can send the global positioning system (GPS) location to the terminal 100, the location marker 1122 can be used to indicate the location of the mobile phone "HUAWEI P30" on the map 1120.
  • GPS global positioning system
  • the Bluetooth headset "HUAWEI Free Buds 2" cannot send the GPS location to the terminal 100 or the Bluetooth headset "HUAWEI Free Buds 2" has no GPS positioning function.
  • the location marker 1123 can be used to indicate the location of the Bluetooth headset "HUAWEI Free Buds 2" on the map 1120 when it was disconnected from the terminal 100 last time.
  • the above-mentioned location refresh control 1111 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to update the location marks of the display terminal 100 and other devices.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation performed by the user on the device option 1113, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a device search interface 1130 as shown in FIG. 11C.
  • the device corresponding to the above device option 1113 may be a Bluetooth headset.
  • the title on the device search interface 1130 may display the name of the Bluetooth headset, for example, "HUAWEI Free Buds 2".
  • the device search interface 1130 includes a map 1140, a positioning device control 1131, a sound playback control 1132, and a radar chart 1133.
  • the map 1140 displays a location mark 1141 of the terminal 100 and a location mark 1142 of the Bluetooth headset.
  • the location mark 1141 is used to indicate the current location of the terminal 100 in the map 1140. Since the terminal 100 cannot obtain the GPS location of the Bluetooth headset, the location mark 1142 is used to indicate that the Bluetooth headset is disconnected from the terminal 100 The location on the map 1140 at time.
  • the positioning device control 1131 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to update the location mark of the terminal 100 and the Bluetooth headset in the displayed map.
  • the play sound control 1132 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to send a sound play request to the Bluetooth headset for requesting the Bluetooth headset to play a sound.
  • the radar chart control 1133 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to measure the location of nearby devices through BLE AoA, and display the location of nearby devices in the radar chart. In this way, measuring the location of nearby devices through BLE AoA can help users find accessory devices when the accessory device cannot be located via GPS.
  • the terminal 100 when the terminal 100 is moving, the location of the location marker 1141 in the map 1140 on the map will also change.
  • the terminal 100 can display prompt information 1134, which is used to prompt that the terminal 100 can be triggered to display accessory devices (such as Bluetooth headsets) in the radar chart. )s position.
  • the prompt message 1134 can be a text prompt (for example, "You have reached the vicinity of'HUAWEI Free Buds 2', you can open the radar chart to find the accessory more accurately"), not limited to text prompts, the prompt message 1134 can also be a picture Prompts, sound prompts, etc.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the radar chart control 1133 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a radar chart interface 1150 as shown in FIG. 11E.
  • the terminal 100 turns on the Bluetooth function, searches for nearby devices through BLE, and measures the direction and position (including direction and distance) of nearby devices through BLE AoA.
  • the radar chart interface 1150 may include a radar chart 1160, a left ear mute control 1151, a play sound control 1152, and a right ear mute control 1153.
  • the terminal 100 searches for the accessory device (such as a Bluetooth headset) and measures the directional position of the Bluetooth headset, the terminal 100 can display the directional position of the accessory device relative to the terminal 100 in the radar chart 1160.
  • the terminal 100 can display the position marker 1161 and the position marker 1162 in the radar chart.
  • the position mark 1161 can be used to indicate the position of the terminal 100 itself in the radar chart.
  • the location mark 1162 can be used to indicate the location of the accessory device (such as a Bluetooth device) in the radar chart 1160.
  • the positional relationship between the position mark 1161 and the position mark 1162 can refer to the position relationship between the terminal 100 and the accessory device, and the distance between the position mark 1161 and the position mark 1162 can be based on the distance between the terminal 100 and nearby devices in a certain proportion To zoom.
  • the direction of the position mark 1162 relative to the position mark 1161 is the same as the direction of the nearby device relative to the terminal 100.
  • the zoom ratio can be 1:50. Since the accessory device may be 1 m in the clockwise direction of the terminal 100 at 270 degrees, the position mark 1162 may be 2 cm in the clockwise direction of the position mark 1161 at 270 degrees.
  • the above examples are only used to explain the application and are not limited here.
  • the terminal 100 may also send a sound playback request to the accessory device via BLE broadcast, for requesting the accessory device to broadcast sound. In this way, users can listen to the voice to determine the position and quickly find the location of the accessory device.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the play sound control 1152 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may send a sound play request to the accessory device (for example, a Bluetooth headset).
  • the accessory device (such as a Bluetooth headset) can play a specified sound (such as a piece of music, a piece of voice, etc.) in response to the sound playback request.
  • the accessory device (such as a Bluetooth headset) may return a sound playback response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may display the prompt message 1155, and replace the playback sound control 1152 with the stop playback control 1154.
  • the prompt information 1155 can be used to prompt the user that the accessory device is currently playing a sound.
  • the prompt information 1155 may be a text prompt, for example, "HUAWEI Free Buds 2 is playing sound."
  • the prompt information 1155 may also be other types of prompts such as pictures and sounds.
  • the stop playing control 1154 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to send a stop playing request to the accessory device (for example, a Bluetooth headset) for requesting the accessory device (for example, a Bluetooth headset) to stop playing sound.
  • the accessory device may be a Bluetooth headset.
  • Some types of Bluetooth headsets may include a left-ear headset and a right-ear headset, and the left-ear headset and the right-ear headset The earphones are separated mechanically independently.
  • the terminal 100 can control the Bluetooth headset to play sound only through the left ear headset or play sound only through the right ear through BLE broadcasting.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the left ear mute control 1151 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may send a left ear mute request to the Bluetooth headset. After receiving the left ear mute request, the Bluetooth headset can prohibit the left ear headset from playing sound.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a click) of the right ear mute control 1153 by the user, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may send a right ear mute request to the Bluetooth headset. After receiving the right ear mute request, the Bluetooth headset can prohibit the right ear headset from playing sound. In this way, it is convenient for the user to find a single left-ear headset or right-ear headset.
  • an operation for example, a click
  • the terminal 100 may receive a user's sliding operation (for example, a three-finger sliding) on the main screen interface, and project the display content on the touch screen of the terminal 100 to be consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation and be closest to the direction. Display device. In this way, the user's screen projection operation steps can be simplified, and the user experience can be improved.
  • a user's sliding operation for example, a three-finger sliding
  • FIG. 12 is a system architecture diagram provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the system 12 includes a terminal 100 and nearby devices. Nearby devices include display device 104 and display device 105, and so on.
  • FIG. 12 exemplarily shows the positional relationship between the terminal 100 and the display device 104 and the display device 105 on a horizontal plane in some application scenarios of the present application.
  • a reference point for example, a central position point
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 can be used to represent its position in the horizontal plane.
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 may be the direction indicated by the vector whose starting point is perpendicular to the upper edge of the touch screen of the terminal 100, as the reference direction of the terminal 100, which may also be referred to as the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100 .
  • the display device 104 may be 0.8 m in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the terminal 100, and the display device 105 may be 0.5 m in a clockwise direction of 90 degrees of the terminal 100.
  • the nearby devices of the terminal 100 may not be limited to the two display devices shown in FIG. 12, and there may be more or less.
  • two display devices are used to explain this application as an example. It should not constitute a limitation.
  • the foregoing FIG. 12 exemplarily shows the relative positional relationship between the foregoing two display devices (display device 104 and display device 105) and the terminal 100, which is only an exemplary explanation of the embodiments of the present application and should not constitute a limitation.
  • the user can open the picture in the gallery application on the terminal 100 through a sliding operation on the main screen interface, and then move the image on the touch screen of the terminal 100 through the sliding operation.
  • the display content is projected to the display device that is consistent with the sliding direction of the sliding operation and is closest in the direction.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 with a home screen.
  • the terminal 100 may receive a sliding operation performed by the user on the interface 510 of the home screen.
  • the sliding operation may be a sliding operation of three fingers touching the touch screen.
  • the starting position of the sliding operation can be any position of the interface 510 of the main screen, and is not limited.
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation can be determined by the start position and the end position of the sliding operation, and the track can be a curve or a straight line, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function and measure the directional position of one or more nearby display devices relative to the terminal 100 through the BLE angle of arrival (AoA).
  • the terminal 100 can determine the sliding direction (for example, the sliding direction is clockwise of the terminal 100) from the one or more display devices (such as the display device 104 and the final display device 105) according to the direction and position of the nearby display device.
  • the 90-degree direction, that is, the terminal 100 is in the right direction) is the same and close to the projection device (for example, the projection device is the display device 104).
  • the terminal 100 may display a prompt box 1310 as shown in FIG. 13B to request the user to confirm whether to project the current display content of the touch screen on the terminal 100 to the receiving device (for example, the display device 105).
  • the receiving device for example, the display device 105.
  • the prompt box 1310 includes a confirmation button 1311 and a cancel button 1312.
  • the confirmation button 1311 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to project the current display content on the screen projection device.
  • the cancel button 549B is used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel the current display content of the screen projection to the screen projection device.
  • the prompt box 1310 may display the device name of the screen projection device, which is used to allow the user to confirm whether the screen projection device meets expectations. Since the screen projection device determined by the terminal 100 is the display device 105, the terminal 100 may display the device name of the display device 105 in the prompt box 1310 (for example, the device name of the display device 105 may be "HUAWEI TV").
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's operation (such as clicking) on the confirmation button 1311 in the prompt box 1310. In response to this operation, the terminal 100 can use Wi-Fi P2P and other communication technologies and some screen projection protocols (such as mircast protocol or dlna protocol). Or airplay protocol, etc.), to project the current display content on the touch screen of the terminal 100 to the projection device.
  • Wi-Fi P2P and other communication technologies and some screen projection protocols (such as mircast protocol or dlna protocol). Or airplay protocol, etc.), to project the current display content on the touch screen of the terminal 100 to the projection device.
  • the screen projection device determined by the terminal 100 can display the device 105.
  • An interface 1320 may be displayed on the display device 105.
  • the interface 1320 is the same as the interface 510 of the main screen currently displayed on the terminal 100 in terms of interface elements.
  • the size of the display screen of the display device 105 and the touch screen of the terminal 100 may be different. Therefore, the size of the interface 1320 displayed by the display device 105 and the size of the interface 510 displayed by the terminal 100 may also be different.
  • the terminal 100 there may be multiple audio devices (for example, Bluetooth speakers, Bluetooth headsets, etc.) near the terminal 100.
  • the user can use a sliding operation (for example, a three-finger sliding) on the music playing interface to establish a Bluetooth connection between the terminal 100 and the closest audio device in the sliding direction of the sliding operation. After the Bluetooth connection is established, the terminal 100 can send audio data to the audio device for playback. In this way, the operation steps for the user to select the audio device to play audio data can be simplified, and the user experience can be improved.
  • FIG. 14 is a system architecture diagram provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the system 14 includes a terminal 100 and nearby devices. Nearby devices include audio device 106 and audio device 107, and so on.
  • FIG. 14 exemplarily shows the positional relationship between the terminal 100 and the audio device 106 and the audio device 107 on a horizontal plane in some application scenarios of the present application.
  • a reference point for example, a central position point
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 can be used to represent its position in the horizontal plane.
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 may be the direction indicated by the vector whose starting point is perpendicular to the upper edge of the touch screen of the terminal 100, as the reference direction of the terminal 100, which may also be referred to as the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100 .
  • the audio device 106 may be at 0.8 m in the 45-degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100, and the audio device 107 may be at 0.5 m in the 90-degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100.
  • the nearby devices of the terminal 100 may not be limited to the two audio devices shown in FIG. 14, and there may be more or less.
  • FIG. 14 two audio devices are used to explain this application as an example. It should not constitute a limitation.
  • the foregoing FIG. 14 exemplarily shows the relative positional relationship between the foregoing two audio devices (audio device 106 and audio device 107) and the terminal 100, which is only an exemplary explanation of the embodiments of the present application and should not constitute a limitation.
  • the terminal 100 on the music playing interface, through a sliding operation (for example, three-finger sliding), the terminal 100 is aligned with the sliding direction of the sliding operation and the closest in the direction
  • the audio device establishes a Bluetooth connection. After the Bluetooth connection is established, the terminal 100 can send audio data to the audio device for playback.
  • the terminal 100 may display an interface 510 with a home screen.
  • the terminal 100 may receive an operation (for example, a single click) of the user acting on the music application icon 512C, and in response to the operation, the terminal 100 may display a music playing interface 1510 as shown in FIG. 15B.
  • the music playing interface 1510 includes a music name 1511, a play/pause control 1512, a previous control 1513, a next control 1514, a playback progress bar 1515, a download control 1516, a sharing control 1517, and more Button 1518, etc.
  • the music name 1511 may be "Dream it possible”.
  • the play/pause control 1512 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to play or pause the audio data corresponding to the music name 1511.
  • the previous control 1513 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to switch to the previous audio data in the playlist for playback.
  • the next control 1514 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to switch to the next audio data in the playlist for playback.
  • the playback progress bar 1515 can be used to indicate the current playback progress of the audio data.
  • the download control 1516 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to download and save the audio data of the music name 1511 to a local storage medium.
  • the sharing control 1517 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to share the playback link of the audio data corresponding to the music name 1511 to other applications.
  • the more controls 1518 can be used to trigger the terminal 100 to display more functional controls related to music playback.
  • the terminal 100 can receive a user's sliding operation on the music playing interface 1510.
  • the sliding operation may be three fingers touching the touch screen to slide.
  • the starting position of the sliding operation can be any position of the music playing interface 1510, which is not limited.
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation can be determined by the start position and the end position of the sliding operation, and the track can be a curve or a straight line, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal 100 can turn on the Bluetooth function, and measure the directional position of one or more nearby audio devices relative to the terminal 100 through the BLE angle of arrival (AoA).
  • AoA BLE angle of arrival
  • the terminal 100 can determine the sliding direction (for example, the sliding direction is the clockwise direction of the terminal 100) from the one or more audio devices (for example, audio device 106, final audio device 107) according to the direction and position of one or more nearby audio devices.
  • the 90-degree direction, that is, the terminal 100 is in the right direction) is the same and close to the playback device (for example, the playback device is the audio device 107).
  • the terminal 100 may display a prompt box 1520 as shown in FIG. 15D for requesting the user to confirm whether to send the audio data corresponding to the music name 1511 to the playback device (for example, the audio device 107) for playback.
  • the playback device for example, the audio device 107
  • the prompt box 1520 includes a confirmation button 1521 and a cancel button 1522.
  • the confirmation button 1521 is used to trigger the terminal 100 to send the audio data corresponding to the aforementioned music name 1511 to a playback device (for example, the audio device 107) for playback.
  • the cancel button 549B is used to trigger the terminal 100 to cancel sending the audio data corresponding to the music name 1511 to the playback device (for example, the audio device 107) for playback.
  • the prompt box 1520 may display the device name of the playback device, which is used to allow the user to confirm whether the playback device meets expectations. Since the playback device determined by the terminal 100 is the audio device 107, the terminal 100 may display the device name of the audio device 107 in the prompt box 1520 (for example, the device name of the audio device 107 may be "HUAWEI AM 08").
  • the terminal 100 can receive the user's operation (for example, click) on the confirmation button 1521 in the prompt box 1520. In response to this operation, the terminal 100 can establish a Bluetooth connection with the playback device (for example, the audio device 107), and correspond to the aforementioned music name 1511 The audio data of is sent to the playback device (for example, the audio device 107) for playback.
  • the playback device for example, the audio device 107
  • the playback device determined by the terminal 100 may be the audio device 107.
  • the terminal 100 can send the audio data corresponding to the music name 1511 to the audio device 107 for playback.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a Bluetooth AoA positioning protocol framework, including but not limited to application (APP) layer, protocol framework (Framework) layer, Bluetooth protocol stack (Stack) and Bluetooth controller (BT Controller) ).
  • APP application
  • Framework protocol framework
  • Stack Bluetooth protocol stack
  • BT Controller Bluetooth controller
  • the application layer may include a Huawei Share application.
  • the Framework layer includes AoA interfaces.
  • the Bluetooth protocol stack (Stack) includes an AoA control module and AoA positioning algorithm.
  • the Bluetooth controller includes an angle of arrival controller (AoA Controller).
  • the Huawei sharing application can be opened first.
  • the Huawei share application can issue AoA measurement commands to the AoA control module in the Bluetooth protocol stack (Stack) through the AoA interface in the protocol framework layer.
  • the AoA control module can control the AoA Controller to send AoA fixed-frequency extension signal (constant tone extension, CTE) broadcast packets to nearby devices.
  • AoA fixed-frequency extension signal constant tone extension, CTE
  • the AoA Controller can measure the in-phase and quadrature (in-phase and quadrature). quadrature, IQ) phase information. After measuring the IQ phase information, the AoA Controller can send the IQ phase information to the AoA control module.
  • the AoA control module can calculate the AoA value of the AoA positioning responder from the IQ phase information through the AoA positioning algorithm. After calculating the AoA value, the AoA control module can send the measured AoA value to the Huawei sharing application through the AoA interface.
  • the underlying AoA control and positioning algorithm capabilities can be packaged into a set of standard SDKs for data sharing services (such as the Huawei share application) to call to implement the data sharing functions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • each terminal device must have a three-antenna architecture and support the BT 5.1 AoA standard for angle measurement and distance measurement.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a Bluetooth antenna system architecture, which may include, but is not limited to, a Bluetooth (BT) chip 1701, a single pole three throw switch (single pole three throw, SP3T) 1702, three radio frequency front-end modules (front end module, FEM) (including RF front-end module 1703A, RF front-end module 1703B and RF front-end module 1703C), three dividers (Extractor) (including frequency divider 1704A, frequency divider 1704B and frequency divider 1704C) , Three antennas (antenna 0, antenna 1, and antenna 2).
  • a Bluetooth (BT) chip 1701 a single pole three throw switch (single pole three throw, SP3T) 1702
  • FEM front end module
  • FEM radio frequency front-end modules
  • Extractor including frequency divider 1704A, frequency divider 1704B and frequency divider 1704C
  • Three antennas (antenna 0, antenna 1, and antenna 2).
  • RF front-end module 1703A and frequency divider 1704A can form RF channel 0 and connect to antenna 0
  • RF front-end module 1703B and frequency divider 1704B can form RF channel 1 and connect to antenna 1
  • RF front-end module 1703C and frequency divider 1704C can The radio frequency channel 2 is formed to connect with the antenna 2.
  • the radio frequency front-end module can be used to control the antenna receiving and transmitting control logic.
  • the single-pole three-throw switch 1702 can be used to switch AoA three antennas for reception.
  • the frequency divider can be used to only receive Bluetooth signals in the 2.4G frequency band.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a Bluetooth chip system architecture, which may include, but is not limited to, an application processor (AP) 1810 and a Bluetooth (BT) chip 1820.
  • the application processor 1810 may include a Bluetooth AoA service (BT AoA Service) 1811 and a Bluetooth AoA protocol stack (BT AoA Stack) 1812.
  • the Bluetooth chip 1820 may include a Bluetooth AoA management module (BT AoA Management) 1821 and a Bluetooth AoA measurement module (BT AoAersure) 1822.
  • the Bluetooth AoA service 1811 may be the Huawei sharing application, the Find My Device application in the foregoing embodiment, and other functions/services/applications that require AoA positioning.
  • the Bluetooth chip system 1800 can be in the AoA positioning transmitter (such as the terminal 100) or the AoA positioning receiver (such as the terminal 101, the terminal 102, the terminal 103, the display device 104, and the display device in the above embodiment). 105, audio device 106, audio device 107, etc.).
  • the following steps can be implemented in the Bluetooth chip system 1800:
  • the Bluetooth AoA service 1811 sends a start command to the Bluetooth AoA protocol stack 1812 to instruct the Bluetooth AoA protocol stack 1812 to perform AoA positioning and ranging.
  • the Bluetooth AoA protocol stack 1812 can send an AoA broadcast command to the Bluetooth AoA management module 1821, instructing the Bluetooth AoA management module 1821 to perform AoA positioning broadcast.
  • the Bluetooth AoA management module 1821 can trigger the Bluetooth AoA measurement module to send an AoA CTE message.
  • the following steps can be implemented in the Bluetooth chip system 1800:
  • the Bluetooth AoA measurement module 1822 may send the AoA CTE message to the Bluetooth AoA management module 1821 after receiving the AoA CTE message sent by the AoA positioning transmitter.
  • the Bluetooth AoA management module 1821 can parse the AoA IQ phase information and the signal received strength value (RSSI) according to the AoA CTE message. Then, the Bluetooth AoA management module 1821 may report the AoA IQ phase information and RSSI to the Bluetooth AoA protocol stack 1812.
  • RSSI signal received strength value
  • the Bluetooth AoA protocol stack 1812 can calculate the AoA value and distance estimation value through the AoA measurement algorithm.
  • the Bluetooth AoA protocol stack 1812 calculates the AoA value and the estimated distance value, it can report the AoA value and the estimated distance value to the Bluetooth AoA service 1811.
  • the Bluetooth AoA service 1811 can use the AoA value and the estimated distance value to arbitrate and determine the positioning result.
  • the AoA positioning receiver may also send the measured AoA value and the estimated distance value to the AoA positioning transmitter, and the AoA service 1811 in the AoA positioning transmitter will arbitrate and determine the positioning result.
  • a nearby device of the terminal 100 may send the AoA value and the estimated distance value (or RSSI value) to the terminal 100 after measuring the AoA value and the estimated distance value (or RSSI value).
  • the terminal 100 can determine whether the location direction of the nearby device is consistent with the user's sliding direction on the touch screen and the distance is the closest according to the AoA value and the estimated distance value (or RSSI value).
  • the AoA positioning receiver can find the AoA value corresponding to the IQ phase information from the AoA fingerprint database according to the measured IQ phase information.
  • the AoA fingerprint library includes the corresponding relationship between IQ phase information and AoA value. Among them, a group of IQ phase information corresponds to an AoA value.
  • the Bluetooth AoA positioning between two devices can be in a BLE connectionless scenario, that is, the two devices can realize AoA positioning without establishing a BLE connection.
  • the two devices involved in the interaction of Bluetooth AoA positioning can be referred to as the AoA positioning transmitter and the AoA positioning receiver.
  • the AoA positioning transmitter may be the terminal 100 in the foregoing embodiment of the application.
  • the AoA positioning receiving end may be the terminal 101, the terminal 102, the terminal 103, the display device 104, the display device 105, the audio device 106, or the audio device 107 in the foregoing embodiment, and so on.
  • Host A refers to the host protocol stack (Host) in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning receiver.
  • LL A refers to the link layer (link layer, LL) in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning receiver.
  • Host B refers to the host protocol stack (Host) in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning transmitter.
  • LL B refers to the link layer (link layer, LL) in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning transmitter.
  • AoA locates the transmitter, and after a series of parameter settings, enables periodic broadcast of BLE AoA messages.
  • specific settings include: LE Set Extended Advertising Parameters, LE Set Periodic Advertising Parameters, and Connectionless Supplemental Parameters (LE Set Connectionless Supplemental Parameters).
  • AoA locates the transmitter to gradually enable connectionless supplemental parameter settings (LE Set Connectionless Supplemental Parameters Enable), enable periodic broadcast parameter settings (LE Set Periodic Advertising Parameters Enable), and enable extended broadcast parameter settings (LE Set Extended Advertising Parameters) Enable).
  • AoA locates the transmitter to fill in the periodic broadcast IQ data, and continuously broadcasts (ADV_EXT_IND) to surrounding devices.
  • the extended broadcast parameter settings can include setting the extended broadcast handle (Advertising Handle), broadcast event properties (Advertising Event Properties), the broadcast interval size range of the broadcast channel (Primary Advertising Interval Min, Primary Advertising Interval Max), and broadcast channel (Primary Advertising Channel Map), Local Address Type (Own Address Type), Local Address (Own Address), Peer Address Type (Peer Address Type), Peer Address (Peer Address), Broadcast Filter Method (Advertising Filter Policy), Transmission Power (Advertising Tx Power), main broadcast PHY type (Primary Advertising PHY), etc.
  • the extended broadcast parameter settings can include setting the handle of the periodic broadcast (Advertising Handle), the size range of the periodic broadcast interval (Periodic Advertising Interval Min, Periodic Advertising Interval Max), periodic advertising properties (Periodic Advertising Properties), and transmit power (Tx Power) ,and many more.
  • connectionless supplementary parameter settings include setting the advertising handle (Advertising Handle), the length of the CTE packet (CTE Length), the type of CTE packet (CTE Type), the number of CTE packets (CTE Count), and the length of the switching mode (Length of Switching Pattern), antenna sequence (Antenna IDs[i]), etc.
  • Host A refers to the host in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning receiver.
  • LL A refers to the link layer (link layer, LL) in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning receiver.
  • Host B refers to the host in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning transmitter.
  • LL B refers to the link layer (link layer, LL) in the Bluetooth protocol on the AoA positioning transmitter.
  • the AoA positioning receiver After the AoA positioning receiver has set the extended scan parameters (LE Set Extended Scan Parameters) and enabled the set extended scan (LE Set Extended Scan Enable), it can receive the AoA Tx broadcast from the AoA positioning transmitter, and perform periodic broadcast synchronization. After the association is successful, the AoA positioning transmitter can periodically broadcast to the AoA positioning receiver according to the cycle agreed by both parties.
  • the AoA positioning receiver can collect and integrate IQ phase information, and input it to the AoA positioning algorithm module for calculation to obtain the angular direction of the AoA positioning transmitter relative to the AoA positioning receiver.
  • the Bluetooth AoA positioning standard protocol shown in FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B can refer to the BT 5.1 AoA standard protocol.
  • the following describes how the terminal 100 determines that the direction and position of nearby devices are consistent with the sliding direction in this application.
  • the compass angle ⁇ 1 of the terminal 100 may be the angle between the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100 and the true north (N) direction of the compass.
  • the sliding angle ⁇ 2 of the sliding operation on the terminal 100 may be the angle between the sliding direction vector of the sliding operation and the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100.
  • the AoA angle ⁇ 3 of the nearby device is the angle between the direction vector from the designated position (for example, the center position) of the nearby device to the designated position (for example, the center position) of the terminal 100 and the 0 degree direction of the nearby device.
  • the compass angle ⁇ 4 of the nearby device may be the angle between the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100 and the true north (N) direction of the compass.
  • the center position point of the terminal 100 may be the direction indicated by the vector whose starting point is perpendicular to the upper edge of the touch screen of the terminal 100, as the 0 degree direction of the terminal 100, which may also be referred to as the reference direction of the terminal 100 .
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation points to the accessory device
  • the difference between the sliding angle ⁇ 2 of the sliding operation and the compass angle ⁇ 1 of the terminal 100, and the difference between the AoA angle ⁇ 3 of the nearby device and the compass angle ⁇ 4 of the nearby device should be equal to 180 degrees.
  • the formula (1) can be as follows:
  • the delta value may be 15 degrees.
  • the estimated ranging of the Bluetooth signal strength value RSSI can be realized in the following two ways.
  • A is the preset signal strength when the transmitting end (ie, the terminal 100) and the receiving end (ie, nearby equipment) are 1 m away, and n is the preset environmental attenuation factor.
  • the nearby device After receiving the BLE broadcast signal sent by the terminal 100, the nearby device can measure the distance to the terminal 100 through the multi-antenna RSSI signal.
  • the process of the multi-antenna ranging method may include:
  • the nearby device after scanning the terminal 100 to broadcast the packet through the BLE, the nearby device can receive different RSSI values on the three antennas.
  • the accessory device may calculate the distance to the terminal 100 according to the average RSSI on the three antennas.
  • the nearby device can calculate the distance to the terminal 100 according to the above formula (2).
  • the nearby device may determine whether the distance is less than a specified distance threshold (for example, 1 m). If yes, step S2105 is executed, and the nearby device may return a confirmation response to the terminal 100; if not, step S2106 may be executed, and the nearby device may not return a confirmation response to the terminal 100.
  • a specified distance threshold for example, 1 m
  • the terminal 100 After the terminal 100 receives the response from the nearby device, it starts AoA positioning and sends an AoA broadcast packet to the nearby device.
  • FIG. 22 shows a flow chart of a data sharing method.
  • the equipment involved in the flowchart of the method includes the terminal 100 and nearby equipment.
  • the nearby devices are exemplified by the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103.
  • the nearby devices may not be limited to the exemplified terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103, and there may be more devices.
  • the positions of the terminal 100 and the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103 can be exemplarily referred to the system architecture shown in FIG. 4 above.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal 100 displays a file display interface.
  • the file display interface displays file objects.
  • the file object may be a file object such as a picture, video, and document.
  • the file display interface may include a picture display interface, a video display interface, a document display interface, and so on.
  • the picture display interface may refer to the picture display interface 540 shown in FIG. 5D or the picture display interface 830 shown in 8D.
  • the video display interface can refer to the video file display interface 630 in FIG. 6C.
  • the terminal 100 receives the user's sliding operation on the display interface.
  • the sliding operation may be three-finger sliding, two-finger sliding, single-finger sliding, knuckle sliding, etc., which are not limited here.
  • the terminal 100 may detect the sliding angle of the sliding operation.
  • the starting position of the sliding operation can be anywhere on the file display interface, and is not limited.
  • the sliding direction of the sliding operation can be determined by the start position and the end position of the sliding operation, and the trajectory can be curved or straight, which is not limited in this application.
  • the sliding angle of the sliding operation may be the angle between the sliding direction of the sliding operation and the direction specified by the terminal 100 (for example, the 0-degree direction of the terminal 100 shown in FIG. 4).
  • the terminal 100 sends a positioning request to nearby devices (for example, the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) through BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 100 can broadcast a positioning request to nearby devices (for example, the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) via BLE.
  • the nearby device After scanning the BLE broadcast of the terminal 100, the nearby device may determine the distance to the terminal 100 according to the signal strength value of the received BLE broadcast.
  • nearby devices After receiving the positioning request sent by the terminal 100, nearby devices can detect the received signal strength value of the BLE broadcast, and determine the distance to the terminal 100 according to the signal strength value broadcast by the BLE.
  • the nearby equipment can determine the distance to the terminal 100 according to the signal strength value broadcast by the BLE.
  • the distance to the terminal 100 For measuring the distance from the terminal 100 with a single-antenna RSSI signal, refer to the above formula (2), and for measuring the distance from the terminal 100 with a multi-antenna RSSI signal, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 21, which will not be repeated here.
  • step S2206 The nearby device may determine whether the distance from the terminal 100 is less than a specified distance threshold. If yes, step S2207 is executed, and the nearby device may send a confirmation response to the terminal 100. If not, the nearby device does not send a confirmation response to the terminal 100.
  • the specified distance threshold may be 1m.
  • Nearby devices include terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103.
  • the terminal 101 may determine that the distance from the terminal 100 is 0.8 m according to the signal strength value RSSI1 received by the BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 102 may determine that the distance from the terminal 100 is 1.2 m according to the signal strength value RSSI2 broadcast by the received BLE.
  • the terminal 103 may determine that the distance from the terminal 100 is 0.5 m according to the signal strength value RSSI3 received by the BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 101 and the terminal 103 can return a confirmation response to the terminal 100 via BLE broadcast. Since the distance between the terminal 102 and the terminal 100 is greater than the specified distance threshold (for example, 1 m), the terminal 102 does not return a confirmation response to the terminal 100, and no longer participates in the subsequent method flow.
  • a specified threshold for example, 1 m
  • the nearby device can also directly determine whether the signal strength value of the positioning request received by the BLE broadcast is greater than the specified strength threshold. If so, step S2207 is executed, and the accessory device can send a confirmation response to the terminal 100. If not, the nearby device does not send a confirmation response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may be referred to as the first terminal.
  • Nearby devices for example, the terminal 101 and the terminal 103 that receive the signal strength value of the BLE broadcast positioning request greater than the specified strength threshold may be referred to as the second terminal. If the nearby device converts the signal strength value of the positioning request received by the BLE broadcast into the distance from the terminal 100, the nearby device (such as the terminal 101 and the terminal 103) whose distance from the terminal 100 is less than the specified distance threshold can be called the second terminal.
  • the terminal 100 may send an AoA broadcast packet to nearby devices.
  • the AoA broadcast packet may be a BLE broadcast packet including a constant tone extension (CTE) signal.
  • CTE constant tone extension
  • the nearby device can measure the AoA angle according to the received AoA broadcast packet.
  • the protocol flow of the nearby device according to the received AoA broadcast packet can refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 19B.
  • a nearby device can measure the AoA angle according to the received AoA broadcast packet. You can refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 18 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the nearby device may broadcast the distance information from the terminal 100, the compass angle, and the AoA angle to the terminal 100 through the BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 101 can combine the distance information (r1) between the terminal 101 and the terminal 100, the compass angle of the terminal 101 ( ⁇ 1), and the AoA angle of the terminal 101 ( ⁇ 1) To the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 103 can send the distance information (r3) between the terminal 103 and the terminal 100, the compass angle ( ⁇ 3) of the terminal 103, and the AoA angle ( ⁇ 3) of the terminal 103 to the terminal 100.
  • the distance information between nearby devices may be the signal strength value RSSI (average RSSI value on three antennas) of the AoA broadcast packet received by nearby devices.
  • the terminal 100 can calculate the distance between the terminal 100 and nearby devices according to formula (2).
  • the distance information between nearby devices (such as terminal 101 and terminal 103) and terminal 100 can also be directly the distance calculated by nearby devices according to the signal strength value RSSI (average RSSI value on three antennas) of the AoA broadcast packet according to the above (2) .
  • the process of calculating the distance based on the received signal strength RSSI reference may be made to the foregoing embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal 100 can determine the closest receiving device in the sliding direction according to the distance information from the nearby device, the sliding direction angle, the compass angle of the local end, the compass angle of the nearby device, and the AoA angle of the nearby device.
  • the terminal 100 may use this unique third terminal Determined as the above receiving device. If there are multiple third terminals in the above-mentioned second terminal (such as terminal 101 and terminal 103) whose direction relative to terminal 100 is the same as the sliding direction, terminal 100 (first terminal) may set the third terminal closest to terminal 100. The terminal is determined to be the aforementioned receiving device.
  • the direction of the receiving device relative to the terminal 100 and the sliding direction may have a certain error, that is, when the angle between the direction of the receiving device relative to the terminal 100 and the sliding direction is less than a specified angle threshold (for example, 15 degrees), it can be considered that the direction of the receiving device relative to the terminal 100 is consistent with the sliding direction.
  • a specified angle threshold for example, 15 degrees
  • the first terminal (terminal 100) may determine according to the location information of one or more second terminals (such as terminal 101 and terminal 103) in the nearby device and the compass angle of the first terminal (terminal 100) The direction and position of the one or more second terminals (for example, terminal 101 and terminal 103) relative to the first terminal, and display the direction and direction of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal (terminal 100) distance.
  • one or more second terminals such as terminal 101 and terminal 103 in the nearby device and the compass angle of the first terminal (terminal 100)
  • the direction and position of the one or more second terminals for example, terminal 101 and terminal 103 relative to the first terminal, and display the direction and direction of the one or more second terminals relative to the first terminal (terminal 100) distance.
  • the terminal 100 may send a data sharing request to the receiving device through BLE broadcast.
  • the receiving device may display a data sharing prompt to prompt the user to confirm receiving the data.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • the data sharing prompt may be the prompt box 560 displayed on the terminal 103 in FIG. 5G.
  • the prompt box 560 includes an accept button 561 and a reject button 562.
  • FIG. 5G For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5G, which is not repeated here.
  • the receiving device receives the user's confirmation receiving operation.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • the confirmation receiving operation may be the above-mentioned FIG. 5G, the terminal 103 receives the user's operation (for example, clicking) on the receiving button 561.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 5G which is not repeated here.
  • the receiving device may establish a file transmission connection with the terminal 100.
  • the file transmission connection can be a Wi-Fi direct connection (Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, or ultra-wideband (UWB) communication connection.
  • Wi-Fi P2P Wi-Fi direct connection
  • Wi-Fi softAP Wi-Fi softAP
  • UWB ultra-wideband
  • the terminal 100 may transmit the file data selected by the user to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the terminal 100 can receive a user's sliding operation in a file display interface (for example, an interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents), and detect the sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • a file display interface for example, an interface displaying file objects such as pictures, videos, and documents
  • the terminal can measure the directional position of nearby devices relative to the terminal through Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) AoA measurement technology.
  • BLE Bluetooth Low Energy
  • the terminal 100 can determine the nearby device whose direction and position are consistent with the sliding direction of the above-mentioned sliding operation, and send the file object in the file display interface to the nearest nearby device whose direction and position are consistent with the sliding direction.
  • the operation steps for users to share file data (such as pictures, videos, documents, etc.) can be simplified, which provides convenience to users.
  • FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of a data sharing method in another embodiment of the present application.
  • the equipment involved in the flowchart of the method includes the terminal 100 and nearby equipment.
  • the nearby devices are exemplified by the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103.
  • the nearby devices may not be limited to the exemplified terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103, and there may be more devices.
  • the positions of the terminal 100 and the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103 can be exemplarily referred to the system architecture shown in FIG. 4 above.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal 100 displays a file selection interface.
  • the file selection interface display includes file options selected by the user.
  • the file selection interface can refer to the file selection interface 940 shown in FIG. 9G.
  • the file options selected by the user are the “travel” video option 955 and the “sunset” video option 956.
  • the file options selected by the user are the “travel” video option 955 and the “sunset” video option 956.
  • the foregoing embodiment which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal 100 receives the user's first operation.
  • the terminal 100 can perform an operation (for example, a single click) on the sending control 949 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9G.
  • an operation for example, a single click
  • the sending control 949 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9G.
  • the terminal 100 broadcasts a positioning request to nearby devices (for example, the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) via BLE.
  • the terminal 100 may broadcast a positioning request to nearby devices (for example, the terminal 101, the terminal 102, and the terminal 103) via BLE.
  • the nearby device After scanning the BLE broadcast of the terminal 100, the nearby device may determine the distance to the terminal 100 according to the signal strength value of the received BLE broadcast.
  • nearby devices After receiving the positioning request sent by the terminal 100, nearby devices can detect the received signal strength value of the BLE broadcast, and determine the distance to the terminal 100 according to the signal strength value broadcast by the BLE.
  • the nearby equipment can determine the distance to the terminal 100 according to the signal strength value broadcast by the BLE.
  • the distance to the terminal 100 For measuring the distance from the terminal 100 with a single-antenna RSSI signal, refer to the above formula (2), and for measuring the distance from the terminal 100 with a multi-antenna RSSI signal, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 21, which will not be repeated here.
  • step S2305 The nearby device may determine whether the distance from the terminal 100 is less than a specified distance threshold. If yes, step S2306 is executed, and the nearby device may send a confirmation response to the terminal 100. If not, the nearby device does not send a confirmation response to the terminal 100.
  • the specified distance threshold may be 1m.
  • Nearby devices include terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103.
  • the terminal 101 may determine that the distance from the terminal 100 is 0.8 m according to the signal strength value RSSI1 received by the BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 102 may determine that the distance from the terminal 100 is 1.2 m according to the signal strength value RSSI2 broadcast by the received BLE.
  • the terminal 103 may determine that the distance from the terminal 100 is 0.5 m according to the signal strength value RSSI3 received by the BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 101 and the terminal 103 can return a confirmation response to the terminal 100 via BLE broadcast. Since the distance between the terminal 102 and the terminal 100 is greater than the specified distance threshold (for example, 1 m), the terminal 102 does not return a confirmation response to the terminal 100, and no longer participates in the subsequent method flow.
  • a specified threshold for example, 1 m
  • the nearby device can also directly determine whether the signal strength value of the positioning request received by the BLE broadcast is greater than the specified strength threshold. If so, step S2207 is executed, and the accessory device can send a confirmation response to the terminal 100. If not, the nearby device does not send a confirmation response to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may be referred to as the first terminal.
  • Nearby devices for example, the terminal 101 and the terminal 103 that receive the signal strength value of the BLE broadcast positioning request greater than the specified strength threshold may be referred to as the second terminal. If the nearby device converts the signal strength value of the positioning request received by the BLE broadcast into the distance to the terminal 100, the nearby device (such as the terminal 101 and the terminal 103) whose distance from the terminal 100 is less than the specified distance threshold can be called the second terminal.
  • the terminal 100 may send an AoA broadcast packet to nearby devices.
  • the AoA broadcast packet may be a BLE broadcast packet including a constant tone extension (CTE) signal.
  • CTE constant tone extension
  • the nearby device can measure the AoA angle according to the received AoA broadcast packet.
  • the protocol flow of the nearby device according to the received AoA broadcast packet can refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 19B.
  • a nearby device can measure the AoA angle according to the received AoA broadcast packet. You can refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 18 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the nearby device may broadcast the distance information from the terminal 100 and the AoA angle to the terminal 100 through BLE broadcast.
  • the terminal 101 may send the distance information (r1) of the terminal 101 and the terminal 100 and the AoA angle ( ⁇ 1) of the terminal 101 to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 103 may send the distance information (r3) between the terminal 103 and the terminal 100 and the AoA angle ( ⁇ 3) of the terminal 103 to the terminal 100.
  • the distance information between nearby devices may be the signal strength value RSSI (average RSSI value on three antennas) of the AoA broadcast packet received by nearby devices.
  • the terminal 100 After the terminal 100 receives the BLE RSSI (average RSSI value on the three antennas) of the AoA broadcast packet, it can calculate the distance between the terminal 100 and nearby devices according to formula (2).
  • the distance information between nearby devices (such as terminal 101 and terminal 103) and terminal 100 can also be directly calculated by nearby devices according to the BLE RSSI (average RSSI value on three antennas) when receiving the AoA broadcast packet according to (2) above distance.
  • BLE RSSI average RSSI value on three antennas
  • the terminal 100 may determine the direction and distance of the nearby device relative to the terminal 100 according to the distance information from the nearby device and the AoA angle of the nearby device.
  • the terminal 100 displays the directional position of the accessory device relative to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may display a radar chart 970 as shown in FIG. 9H above.
  • the terminal 100 may display the directional positions of the nearby devices relative to the terminal 100 in the radar chart 970.
  • nearby devices may include terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103.
  • the device name of the terminal 101 may be "Verseau”
  • the device name of the terminal 102 may be "Daniel”
  • the device name of the terminal 103 may be "HUAWEI P30 Pro".
  • the directional positions of nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) measured by terminal 100 can refer to the positional relationship between terminal 100 and nearby devices (terminal 101, terminal 102, and terminal 103) shown in FIG. 4 as an example.
  • the terminal 101 may be 0.8 m in a clockwise direction of 315 degrees of the terminal 100
  • the terminal 102 may be 1.2 m in a 45 degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100
  • the terminal 103 may be 0.5 m in a 90 degree clockwise direction of the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 may display its own position mark 971, the position mark 972 of the terminal 101, the position mark 973 of the terminal 102, and the position mark 974 of the terminal 103 on the radar chart 970.
  • the positional relationship between the location mark 971 of the terminal 100 and the location mark of nearby devices may refer to the positional relationship between the terminal 100 and nearby devices.
  • the distance between the position markers can be scaled according to the distance between the terminal 100 and nearby devices according to a certain ratio.
  • the direction of the position markers (position marker 972, position marker 973, and position marker 974) of the nearby device relative to the position marker 971 is the same as the direction of the nearby device relative to the terminal 100.
  • the terminal 100 receives the second operation of the user selecting the receiving device.
  • the second operation may be the operation (for example, clicking) on the position mark 974 in FIG. 9H, since the position mark 974 corresponds to the terminal 103. Therefore, the terminal 100 can determine that the receiving device is the terminal 103 according to the operation on the location mark 974.
  • the terminal 100 sends a data sharing request to the receiving device through the BLE broadcast.
  • the receiving device may display a data sharing prompt to prompt the user to confirm receiving the data.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • the data sharing prompt may be the prompt box 990 displayed on the terminal 103 in FIG. 9I.
  • the prompt box 990 includes an accept button 991 and a reject button 992.
  • FIG. 9I For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9I, which will not be repeated here.
  • the receiving device receives the user's confirmation receiving operation.
  • the receiving device may be the terminal 103.
  • the confirmation receiving operation may be the terminal 103 in FIG. 9I receiving the user's operation (for example, clicking) on the receiving button 991.
  • FIG. 9I For specific content, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9I, which will not be repeated here.
  • the receiving device may establish a file transmission connection with the terminal 100.
  • the file transmission connection can be a Wi-Fi direct connection (Wi-Fi P2P), Wi-Fi softAP, or ultra-wideband (UWB) communication connection.
  • Wi-Fi P2P Wi-Fi direct connection
  • Wi-Fi softAP Wi-Fi softAP
  • UWB ultra-wideband
  • the terminal 100 may transmit the file data selected by the user to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the terminal 100 may send the video file corresponding to the "travel" video option 955 and the video file corresponding to the "sunset” video option 956 shown in FIG. 9G to the receiving device (for example, the terminal 103).
  • the receiving device for example, the terminal 103.
  • the terminal 100 can receive the operation after the user selects the file object such as the picture, video, and document to be shared, trigger the measurement and display the direction and position of the nearby device (including direction and distance). Then, the terminal 100 receives the user's operation and selects the receiving device of the file from nearby devices to trigger the terminal 100 to send the file object selected by the user to the receiving device. In this way, the user can know the location of the nearby device when sharing the file data with the nearby device through the terminal 100, which is convenient for the user to determine the receiving device of the file data.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Telephone Function (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统，涉及短距离通信技术领域。该方法包括：首先，第一终端显示文件展示界面，该文件展示界面中显示有文件对象。然后，第一终端接收用户针对该文件对象的滑动操作。响应于该滑动操作，该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息。接着，该第一终端根据该滑动操作的滑动方向、该第一终端的指南针角度以及该一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从该一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备。最后，该第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据（例如图片、视频、文档等）的操作步骤。

Description

数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统
本申请要求于2019年08月08日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910731372.4、申请名称为“数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及短距离通信技术领域，尤其涉及数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统。
背景技术
随着无线通讯技术的发展，智能手机、平板电脑等终端开始支持用户分享图片、文档等数据，提高了用户的办公效率和办公体验。例如，用户可以无须使用数据线将智能手机等便携式终端上的图片、文档等数据分享给其他设备。
目前，用户想要分享智能手机等便携式终端上的图片等数据，一般可以通过下述方式达到目的：用户需要在图库中选择照片，点击“分享”按钮打开分享界面。然后，在智能手机搜索到周围的设备后，可以在设备分享界面显示周围设备的选项。在用户点击选择一个周围设备的按钮后，智能手机可以与用户选中的设备进行连接，并将用户选中的图片发送给该用户选中的设备。
可以看出，上述数据分享的方式，均需要用户执行多次复杂的操作，这就大大降低了终端的使用效率。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统，可以简化用户分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)的操作步骤，给用户提供了方便。
第一方面，本申请提供了一种数据分享的方法，包括：第一终端显示文件展示界面，该文件展示界面中显示有文件对象。该第一终端接收用户针对该文件对象的滑动操作。响应于该滑动操作，该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息。该第一终端根据该滑动操作的滑动方向、该第一终端的指南针角度以及该一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从该一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备。其中，在该一个或多个第二终端中，该接收设备相对于该第一终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值。该接收设备相对于该第一终端的方向由该第一终端的指南针角度以及该接收设备的位置信息确定。该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备。
本申请提供一种数据分享的方法，第一终端可以通过在文件展示界面(例如，显示有图片、视频和文档等文件对象的界面)中接收用户的滑动操作，并检测该滑动操作的滑动方向。终端可以响应于该滑动操作，通过低功耗蓝牙(Bluetooth Low Energy，BLE)到达角(angle of arrival，AoA)测量技术，测量附近设备相对于终端的方向位置。然后，第一终端可以确定出方向位置与上述滑动操作的滑动方向一致且较近的第二设备，并将该文 件展示界面中的文件对象发送给方向位置与滑动方向一致且最近的第二设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)的操作步骤，给用户提供了方便。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，该方法还包括：该第一终端通过BLE广播定位请求。其中，该第二终端接收到该定位请求时的BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。这样，可以将距离第一终端较远的设备过滤掉，保证了文件传输的稳定性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备之前，该方法包括：该第一终端发送数据分享请求给该接收设备。该接收设备响应于该数据分享请求，显示第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收该文件对象。这样，可以让用户在接收设备上确认是否接收第一终端发送的文件对象，避免接收终端接收到用户不想接收的数据。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该接收设备响应于用户针对该文件对象的接收操作，与该第一终端建立文件传输连接。其中，该文件传输连接包括无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接或超宽带UWB连接。这样，通过Wi-Fi P2P或UWB传输文件，可以提高文件传输的效率。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该位置信息包括：该第二终端的指南针角度、该第二终端的BLE信号到达角度AoA，该一个或多个附近终端与该终端的距离。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备之前，该方法还包括：该第一终端显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送该文件对象给该接收设备。该第一终端接收用户的确认发送操作。该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备，具体包括响应于该确认发送操作，该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备。这样，可以防止用户在第一终端上由于误操作误发送了文件对象给其他设备，提高了容错性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，当该一个或多个第二终端中，存在有多个第三终端相对于该终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值时，该接收设备在该多个第三终端中，相对于该第一终端的方向在该滑动方向上的投影距离最近。这样，可以当滑动方向上有多个设备时，只发送文件到在该滑动方向上距离第一终端最近的设备，符合用户使用习惯。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端通过BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之后，该方法还包括：该第一终端根据该一个或多个第二终端的位置信息以及该第一终端的指南针角度，确定该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。该第一终端显示该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。这样，可以帮助用户查看周围设备的位置，提高用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，该方法还包括：该第一终端通过BLE广播发送AoA广播包给该一个或多个第二终端。该第二终端在接收到该AoA广播包后，根据接收到该AoA广播包时的相位信息确定出该BLE信号AoA，并根据接收到该AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI确定出与该第一终端的距离。该第二终端通过BLE广播发送的该BLE AoA、该第二终端与该第一终端的距离和该第二终端的指南针角度。
第二方面，本申请提供了一种终端，该终端为第一终端，该终端包括：处理器、蓝牙模块，存储器，触控屏，无线高保真Wi-Fi模块。其中，该处理器和该存储器耦合，该处理器与该蓝牙模块和该触控屏连接。其中，该触控屏，用于显示文件展示界面，该文件展示界面中显示有文件对象。该触控屏，还用于接收用户针对该文件对象的滑动操作。该处理器，用于响应于该滑动操作，指示该蓝牙模块通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二设备的位置信息。该处理器，还用于根据该滑动操作的滑动方向、该终端的指南针角度以及该设备一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从该一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备。其中，在该一个或多个第二终端中，该接收设备相对于该第一终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值。该接收设备相对于该第一终端的方向由该第一终端的指南针角度以及该接收设备的位置信息确定。该Wi-Fi模块，用于发送该文件对象给该接收设备。
本申请提供一种终端，该终端可以被称为第一终端。第一终端可以通过在文件展示界面(例如，显示有图片、视频和文档等文件对象的界面)中接收用户的滑动操作，并检测该滑动操作的滑动方向。终端可以响应于该滑动操作，通过BLE AoA测量技术，测量附近设备相对于终端的方向位置。然后，第一终端可以确定出方向位置与上述滑动操作的滑动方向一致且较近的第二设备，并将该文件展示界面中的文件对象发送给方向位置与滑动方向一致且最近的第二设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)的操作步骤，给用户提供了方便。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该蓝牙模块，还用于：在通过BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播定位请求。其中，该第二终端接收到该定位请求时的BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。这样，可以将距离第一终端较远的设备过滤掉，保证了文件传输的稳定性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该蓝牙模块，还用于：在该Wi-Fi模块发送该文件对象给该接收设备之前，发送数据分享请求给该接收设备。该数据分享请求用于请求该接收设备输出第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收该文件对象。这样，可以让用户在接收设备上确认是否接收第一终端发送的文件对象，避免接收终端接收到用户不想接收的数据。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该Wi-Fi模块，还用于在该接收设备检测到用户针对该文件对象的接收操作后，与该接收设备建立无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接。这样，通过Wi-Fi P2P或UWB传输文件，可以提高文件传输的效率。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该位置信息包括：该第二终端的指南针角度、该第二终端的BLE信号到达角度AoA，该一个或多个附近终端与该终端的距离。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该触控屏，还用于：在该Wi-Fi模块发送该文件对象给该接收设备之前，显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送该文件对象给该接收设备。该触控屏，还用于接收用户的确认发送操作。该Wi-Fi模块，具体用于：响应于该确认发送操作，发送该文件对象给该接收设备。这样，可以防止用户在第一终端上由于误操作误发送了文件对象给其他设备，提高了容错性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，当该一个或多个第二终端中，存在有多个第三终端相对于该终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值时，该接收设备在该多个第三终端中， 相对于该第一终端的方向在该滑动方向上的投影距离最近。这样，可以当滑动方向上有多个设备时，只发送文件到在该滑动方向上距离第一终端最近的设备，符合用户使用习惯。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该处理器，还用于：在该蓝牙模块通过BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之后，根据该一个或多个第二终端的位置信息以及该第一终端的指南针角度，确定该一个或多多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。该触控屏，还用于显示该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。这样，可以帮助用户查看周围设备的位置，提高用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该蓝牙模块，还用于：在通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播发送AoA广播包给该一个或多个第二终端。其中，该AoA广播包用于该第二终端根据接收该AoA广播时的相位信息确定出该BLE AoA，并根据接收到该AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI确定出与该第一终端的距离。该蓝牙模块，还用于接收该第二终端通过BLE广播发送的该BLE AoA、该第二终端与该第一终端的距离和该第二终端的指南针角度。
第三方面，本申请提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统设置在第一终端中，该芯片系统包括：处理器和蓝牙芯片。其中，该处理器，用于指示触控屏显示文件展示界面，该文件展示界面中显示有文件对象。该处理器，还用于通过该触控屏接收用户针对该文件对象的滑动操作。该处理器，还用于响应于该滑动操作，指示该蓝牙芯片通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二设备的位置信息。该处理器，还用于根据该滑动操作的滑动方向、该终端的指南针角度以及该设备一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从该一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备。其中，在该一个或多个第二终端中，该接收设备相对于该第一终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值。该接收设备相对于该第一终端的方向由该第一终端的指南针角度以及该接收设备的位置信息确定。该处理器，还用于指示无线高保真Wi-Fi模块发送该文件对象给该接收设备。
本申请提供一种芯片系统，该芯片系统可以设置于第一终端中。第一终端可以通过在文件展示界面(例如，显示有图片、视频和文档等文件对象的界面)中接收用户的滑动操作，并检测该滑动操作的滑动方向。终端可以响应于该滑动操作，通过BLE AoA测量技术，测量附近设备相对于终端的方向位置。然后，第一终端可以确定出方向位置与上述滑动操作的滑动方向一致且较近的第二设备，并将该文件展示界面中的文件对象发送给方向位置与滑动方向一致且最近的第二设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)的操作步骤，给用户提供了方便。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该蓝牙芯片，还用于：在通过BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播定位请求。其中，该第二终端接收到该定位请求时BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。这样，可以将距离第一终端较远的设备过滤掉，保证了文件传输的稳定性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该蓝牙芯片，还用于：在该处理器指示该Wi-Fi模块发送该文件对象给该接收设备之前，发送数据分享请求给该接收设备。该数据分享请求用于请 求该接收设备输出第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收该文件对象。这样，可以让用户在接收设备上确认是否接收第一终端发送的文件对象，避免接收终端接收到用户不想接收的数据。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该处理器，还用于：在该接收设备检测到用户针对该文件对象的接收操作后，指示该WiFi模块与该接收设备建立无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接。这样，通过Wi-Fi P2P或UWB传输文件，可以提高文件传输的效率。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该位置信息包括：该第二终端的指南针角度、该第二终端的BLE信号到达角度AoA，该一个或多个附近终端与该终端的距离。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该处理器，还用于：在指示该Wi-Fi模块发送该文件对象给该接收设备之前，指示该触控屏显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送该文件对象给该接收设备。该处理器，还用于通过该触控屏接收用户的确认发送操作。该处理器，具体用于：响应于该确认发送操作，指示该Wi-Fi模块发送该文件对象给该接收设备。这样，可以防止用户在第一终端上由于误操作误发送了文件对象给其他设备，提高了容错性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，当该一个或多个第二终端中，存在有多个第三终端相对于该终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值时，该接收设备在该多个第三终端中，相对于该第一终端的方向在该滑动方向上的投影距离最近。这样，可以当滑动方向上有多个设备时，只发送文件到在该滑动方向上距离第一终端最近的设备，符合用户使用习惯。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该处理器，还用于：在该蓝牙芯片通过BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之后，根据该一个或多个第二终端的位置信息以及该第一终端的指南针角度，确定该一个或多多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。该处理器，还用于指示该触控屏显示该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。这样，可以帮助用户查看周围设备的位置，提高用户体验。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播发送AoA广播包给该一个或多个第二终端。其中，该AoA广播包用于该第二终端根据接收该AoA广播时的相位信息确定出该BLE AoA，并根据接收到该AoA广播包时的RSSI确定出与该第一终端的距离。该蓝牙芯片，还用于接收该第二终端通过BLE广播发送的该BLE AoA、该第二终端与该第一终端的距离和该第二终端的指南针角度。
第四方面，本申请提供了一种数据分享的方法，该包括：第一终端显示文件选择界面，该文件选择界面中显示有用户已选定的文件选项。该第一终端接收用户的第一操作。响应于该第一操作，该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息。该第一终端根据该一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，确定该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。该第一终端显示该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离。该第一终端接收用户选择该一个或多个第二终端中接收设备的第二操作。响应于该第二操作，该第一终端发送该文件选项对应的文件对象给该接收设备。
通过本申请提供一种数据分享的方法，第一终端可以在用户选择要分享的图片、视频、文档等文件对象后，接收用的操作，触发测量并显示一个或多个第二设备的方向位置(包括方向与距离)。然后，第一终端接收用户的操作，从该一个或多个第二设备中选择出文件 的接收设备，以触发第一终端将用户选中的文件对象发送给接收设备。这样，用户可以在通过第一终端分享文件数据给附近设备时，知晓附近设备的位置，便于用户确定文件数据的接收设备。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该第一终端显示该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端的方向和距离，具体包括：该第一终端显示该第一终端的位置标记和该一个或多个第二终端的位置标记。其中，该第二终端的位置标记相对应于该第一终端的位置标记的方向和距离由该第一终端的指南针角度以及该第二终端的位置信息确定。该第二操作包括：该用户针对该接收设备的位置标记的操作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，该方法还包括：该第一终端通过BLE广播定位请求。其中，该第二终端接收到该定位请求时的BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。这样，可以将距离第一终端较远的设备过滤掉，保证了文件传输的稳定性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端发送该文件选项对应的文件对象给该接收设备之前，该方法包括：该第一终端发送数据分享请求给该接收设备。该接收设备响应于该数据分享请求，显示第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收该文件对象。这样，可以让用户在接收设备上确认是否接收第一终端发送的文件对象，避免接收终端接收到用户不想接收的数据。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该接收设备响应于用户的确认接收操作，与该第一终端建立文件传输连接。其中该文件传输连接包括无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接或超宽带UWB连接。这样，通过Wi-Fi P2P或UWB传输文件，可以提高文件传输的效率。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该第一终端发送该文件选项对应的文件对象给该接收设备之前，该方法还包括：该第一终端显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送该文件选项对应的文件对象给该接收设备。该第一终端接收用户的确认发送操作。该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备，具体包括：响应于该确认发送操作，该第一终端发送该文件对象给该接收设备。这样，可以防止用户在第一终端上由于误操作误发送了文件对象给其他设备，提高了容错性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在该终端通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，该方法还包括：该第一终端通过BLE广播发送到达角AoA广播包给该一个或多个第二终端。该第二终端在接收到该AoA广播包后，根据接收到该AoA广播包时的相位信息确定出该BLE信号AoA，并根据接收到该AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI确定出与该第一终端的距离。该第二终端通过BLE广播发送该BLE信号AoA、该第二终端与该第一终端的距离。
第五方面，本申请提供了一种数据分享的方法，该方法包括：第一终端显示第一界面。该第一终端接收用户针对第一界面的滑动操作。响应于该滑动操作，该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个显示设备的位置信息。该第一终端根据该滑动操作的滑动方向、该第一终端的指南针角度以及该一个或多个显示的位置信息，从该一个或多个显示 中确定出投屏设备。其中，在该一个或多个显示中，该投屏设备相对于该第一终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值。该投屏设备相对于该第一终端的方向由该第一终端的指南针角度以及该播放设备的位置信息确定。该第一终端将触控屏上的显示内容投屏至将该投屏设备上显示。
通过本申请提供的一种数据分享的方法，第一终端可以接收用户在第一界面(例如屏幕的主界面)的滑动操作(例如，三指滑动)，将终端100的触控屏上的显示内容投屏至与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的显示设备。这样，可以简化用户投屏的操作步骤，提高了用户体验。
第六方面，本申请提供了一种数据分享的方法，该方法包括：第一终端显示音乐播放界面，该音乐播放界面中显示有用户选中待播放或正在播放的音乐文件。该第一终端接收用户的滑动操作。响应于该滑动操作，该第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个音频设备的位置信息。该第一终端根据该滑动操作的滑动方向、该第一终端的指南针角度以及该一个或多个音频设备的位置信息，从该一个或多个音频设备中确定出播放设备。其中，在该一个或多个音频设备中，该播放设备相对于该第一终端的方向与该滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值。该播放设备相对于该第一终端的方向由该第一终端的指南针角度以及该播放设备的位置信息确定。该第一终端与播放设备建立蓝牙连接。该第一终端可以将该音乐文件对应的音频数据发送至该音频设备上播放。
通过本申请提供的一种数据分享的方法，第一终端可以接收用户在音乐播放界面的滑动操作(例如，三指滑动)，将第一终端与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的音频设备建立蓝牙连接。建立蓝牙连接之后，第一终端可以将音频数据发送至该音频设备上播放。这样，可以简化用户选择音频设备播放音频数据的操作步骤，减少了用户针对第一终端和音频设备的配对连接操作，提高了用户体验。
第七方面，本申请提供了一种通信装置，包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合，一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时，使得通信装置执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享的方法。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质，包括计算机指令，当计算机指令在终端上运行时，使得终端执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享的方法。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式中的数据分享的方法。
附图说明
图1A为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图；
图1B为本申请实施例提供的一种蓝牙协议的框架示意图；
图2A为本申请实施例提供的一种显示设备的结构示意图；
图2B为本申请实施例提供的一种音频设备的结构示意图；
图3A-图3D为本申请的相关技术中的一组界面示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构示意图；
图5A-5J为本申请实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图6A-6G为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图7A-7F为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图8A-8G为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图9A-9J为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图10A-10G为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图11A-11F为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图12为本申请另一实施例提供的一种系统架构示意图；
图13A-13C为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图14为本申请另一实施例提供的一种系统架构示意图；
图15A-15E为本申请另一实施例提供的一组界面示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种蓝牙AoA定位协议框架示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种蓝牙天线系统框架示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种蓝牙芯片系统架构示意图；
图19A-19B为本申请实施例提供的一组蓝牙标准协议交互示意图；
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种终端相对位置示意图；
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种蓝牙多天线测距流程示意图；
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种数据分享方法的流程示意图；
图23为本申请另一实施例提供的一种数据分享方法的流程示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清除、详尽地描述。其中，在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示或的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，另外，在本申请实施例的描述中，“多个”是指两个或多于两个。
以下，术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征，在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。
首先，介绍本申请以下实施例中提供的示例性的终端100。
图1A示出了终端100的结构示意图。
下面以终端100为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是，图1A所示终端100仅 是一个范例，并且终端100可以具有比图1A中所示的更多的或者更少的部件，可以组合两个或多个的部件，或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。
终端100可以包括：处理器110，外部存储器接口120，内部存储器121，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口130，充电管理模块140，电源管理模块141，电池142，天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，传感器模块180，按键190，马达191，指示器192，摄像头193，显示屏194，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A，陀螺仪传感器180B，气压传感器180C，磁传感器180D，加速度传感器180E，距离传感器180F，接近光传感器180G，指纹传感器180H，温度传感器180J，触摸传感器180K，环境光传感器180L，骨传导传感器180M等。
可以理解的是，本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对终端100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，终端100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调处理器，图形处理器(graphics processing unit，GPU)，图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，存储器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。
其中，控制器可以是终端100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。
处理器110中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中，处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器110的等待时间，因而提高了系统的效率。
在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit，I2C)接口，集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound，I2S)接口，脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation，PCM)接口，通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter，UART)接口，移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface，MIPI)，通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output，GPIO)接口，用户标识模块(subscriber identity module，SIM)接口，和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口等。
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线，包括一根串行数据线(serial data line，SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line，SCL)。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K，充电器，闪光灯，摄 像头193等。例如：处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K，使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信，实现终端100的触摸功能。
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合，实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信，将模拟信号抽样，量化和编码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中，音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线，用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中，UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如：处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信，实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号，实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194，摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface，CSI)，显示屏串行接口(display serial interface，DSI)等。在一些实施例中，处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信，实现终端100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信，实现终端100的显示功能。
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号，也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中，GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193，显示屏194，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口，I2S接口，UART接口，MIPI接口等。
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口，具体可以是Mini USB接口，Micro USB接口，USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为终端100充电，也可以用于终端100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机，通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他终端，例如AR设备等。
可以理解的是，本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系，只是示意性说明，并不构成对终端100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，终端100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式，或多种接口连接方式的组合。
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中，充电器可以是无线充电器，也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中，充电管理模块140可以通过终端100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块141为终端供电。
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142，充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入，为处理器110，内部存储器121，外部存储器，显示屏194，摄像头193，和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用 于监测电池容量，电池循环次数，电池健康状态(漏电，阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中，电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中，电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。
终端100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。终端100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在终端100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中，移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中，调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后，被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A，受话器170B等)输出声音信号，或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中，调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110，与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在终端100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)网络)，蓝牙(bluetooth，BT)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信技术(near field communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。
在一些实施例中，终端100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合，天线2和无线通信模块160耦合，使得终端100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications，GSM)，通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service，GPRS)，码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)，宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)，时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access，TD-SCDMA)，长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)，BT，GNSS，WLAN，NFC，FM，和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系 统(global positioning system，GPS)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GLONASS)，北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system，BDS)，准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system，QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems，SBAS)。
终端100通过GPU，显示屏194，以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器，连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算，用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU，其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。
显示屏194用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)，有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的，AMOLED)，柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode，FLED)，Miniled，MicroLed，Micro-oLed，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)等。在一些实施例中，终端100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194，N为大于1的正整数。
终端100可以通过ISP，摄像头193，视频编解码器，GPU，显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如，拍照时，打开快门，光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上，光信号转换为电信号，摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理，转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点，亮度，肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光，色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中，ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device，CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor，CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号，之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB，YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中，终端100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193，N为大于1的正整数。
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号，除了可以处理数字图像信号，还可以处理其他数字信号。例如，当终端100在频点选择时，数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。终端100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样，终端100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频，例如：动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group，MPEG)1，MPEG2，MPEG3，MPEG4等。
NPU为神经网络(neural-network，NN)计算处理器，通过借鉴生物神经网络结构，例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式，对输入信息快速处理，还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现终端100的智能认知等应用，例如：图像识别，人脸识别，语音识别，文本理解等。
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡，例如Micro SD卡，实现扩展终端100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信，实现数据存储功能。 例如将音乐，视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码，所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，从而执行终端100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作系统，至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能，图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储终端100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据，电话本等)等。此外，内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件，闪存器件，通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage，UFS)等。
终端100可以通过音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放，录音等。
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出，也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中，音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中，或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。
扬声器170A，也称“喇叭”，用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。终端100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐，或收听免提通话。
受话器170B，也称“听筒”，用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当终端100接听电话或语音信息时，可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。
麦克风170C，也称“话筒”，“传声器”，用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时，用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声，将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。终端100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中，终端100可以设置两个麦克风170C，除了采集声音信号，还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中，终端100还可以设置三个，四个或更多麦克风170C，实现采集声音信号，降噪，还可以识别声音来源，实现定向录音功能等。
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130，也可以是3.5mm的开放移动终端平台(open mobile terminal platform，OMTP)标准接口，美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA，CTIA)标准接口。
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号，可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中，压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多，如电阻式压力传感器，电感式压力传感器，电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A，电极之间的电容改变。终端100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194，终端100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。终端100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中，作用于相同触摸位置，但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作，可以对应不同的操作指令。例如：当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行新建短消息的指令。
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定终端100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中，可以通过陀 螺仪传感器180B确定终端100围绕三个轴(即，x，y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的，当按下快门，陀螺仪传感器180B检测终端100抖动的角度，根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离，让镜头通过反向运动抵消终端100的抖动，实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航，体感游戏场景。
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中，终端100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度，辅助定位和导航。
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。终端100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中，当终端100是翻盖机时，终端100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态，设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。
加速度传感器180E可检测终端100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当终端100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别终端姿态，应用于横竖屏切换，计步器等应用。
距离传感器180F，用于测量距离。终端100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中，拍摄场景，终端100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器，例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。终端100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。终端100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时，可以确定终端100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时，终端100可以确定终端100附近没有物体。终端100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持终端100贴近耳朵通话，以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式，口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。终端100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合，检测终端100是否在口袋里，以防误触。
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。终端100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁，访问应用锁，指纹拍照，指纹接听来电等。
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中，终端100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度，执行温度处理策略。例如，当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值，终端100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能，以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中，当温度低于另一阈值时，终端100对电池142加热，以避免低温导致终端100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中，当温度低于又一阈值时，终端100对电池142的输出电压执行升压，以避免低温导致的异常关机。
触摸传感器180K，也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194，由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏，也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器，以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中，触摸传感器180K也可以设置于终端100的表面，与显示屏194所处的位置不同。
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏，接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中，骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中，结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号，解析出语音信号，实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息，实现心率检测功能。
按键190包括开机键，音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。终端100可以接收按键输入，产生与终端100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示，也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如，作用于不同应用(例如拍照，音频播放等)的触摸操作，可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作，马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如：时间提醒，接收信息，闹钟，游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。
指示器192可以是指示灯，可以用于指示充电状态，电量变化，也可以用于指示消息，未接来电，通知等。
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195，或从SIM卡接口195拔出，实现和终端100的接触和分离。终端100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口，N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡，Micro SIM卡，SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同，也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。终端100通过SIM卡和网络交互，实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中，终端100采用eSIM，即：嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在终端100中，不能和终端100分离。
终端100还可以包括有磁力计(图中未示出)，又可称为电子罗盘、指南针，可用于检测磁场强度以及方向。
下面介绍本申请中的一种蓝牙协议架构图。
如图1B所示，本申请实施例提供一种蓝牙协议框架，包括但不限于主机协议栈(Host)、主机控制接口(Host Controller Interface，HCI)、控制器(controller)。
其中，Host协议栈定义了蓝牙框架中的多个应用(profile)和核心协议(protocol)，每个profile定义了各自相应的消息格式与应用规则，profile是蓝牙服务(Application)。为了实现不同平台下的不同设备的互联互通，蓝牙协议为各种可能的、有通用意义的应用场景，都制定的了规范，如蓝牙音频传输协议(advanced audio distribution profile，A2DP)、免提协议(hands-free profile，HFP)等等。
核心协议包括但不限于蓝牙基本的服务协议(service discover protocol，SDP)、逻辑链路控制和适配协议(logical link control and adaptation protocol，L2CAP)等。核心协议是蓝牙协议栈中必不可少的。
其中，HCI为上层协议提供了进入链路管理器的统一接口和进入基带的统一方式,在主机核心协议栈和控制器之间会存在若干传输层,这些传输层是透明的,完成传输数据的任务, 蓝牙技术联盟(bluetoothspecial Interest Group，SIG)规定了四种与硬件连接的物理总线方式,即四种HCI传输层:USB、RS232、UART和PC卡。
其中，controller定义了底层硬件部分，包括无线射频(RF)、基带(BB)和链路管理(LM)，RF层通过2.4GHz无需授权的ISM频段的微波，实现数据位流的过滤和传输，主要定义了蓝牙收发器在此频带正常工作所需要满足的条件。基带负责跳频以及蓝牙数据和信息帧的传输。链路管理负责连接、建立和拆除链路并进行安全控制。链路管理(Link Manager，LM)层是蓝牙协议栈的链路管理层协议,负责将上层HCI命令翻译成基带能接受的操作,建立异步链路(asynchronous connection-oriented link，ACL)和同步链路(synchronous connection-oriented/extended，SCO)以及使蓝牙设备进入节能状态的工作模式等。链路控制(link control，LC)层负责在一批数据包传送期间，响应上层LM命令(如执行建立数据包的传输链路,维持链路等功能的LM命令)。
本申请实施例所述的方法由图1A所示的终端100的无线通信模块160来实现的部分内容，具体可以是蓝牙模块或者是蓝牙芯片来执行。
图2A示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的显示设备200的结构示意图。
下面以显示设备200为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是，图2A所示显示设备200仅是一个范例，并且显示设备200可以具有比图2A中所示的更多或更少的部件，可以组合两个或多个的部件，或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现，
如图2A所示，显示设备200可以包括：处理器201，存储器202，无线通信处理模块203，天线204，电源开关205，有线LAN通信处理模块206，HDMI通信处理模块207，USB通信处理模块208，显示屏209，音频模块210。其中：
处理器201可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中，处理器201可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中，控制器主要负责指令译码，并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中，处理器201的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(ASIC)架构、MIPS架构、ARM架构或者NP架构等等。
在一些实施例中，处理器201可以用于解析无线通信模块203和/或有线LAN通信处理模块206接收到的信号，如终端100广播的探测请求，等等。处理201可以用于根据解析结果进行相应的处理操作，如生成探测响应，等等。
在一些实施例中，处理器201还可用于生成无线通信模块203和/或有线LAN通信处理模块206向外发送的信号，如蓝牙广播信号、信标信号。
存储器202与处理器201耦合，用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中，存储器202可包括高速随机存取的存储器，并且也可包括非易失性存储器，例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器202可以存储操作系统，例如uCOS，VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器202还可以存储通信程序，该通信程序可用于终端100，一个或多个服务器，或附件设备进行通信。
无线通信模块203可以包括蓝牙通信模块203A、WLAN通信模块203B、红外线通信模块204C中的一项或多项。其中，蓝牙通信模块203A可以包括经典蓝牙(BT)模块和低功耗蓝牙(BLE)模块，
在一些实施例中，蓝牙通信模块203A、WLAN通信模块203B、红外线通信模块204C中的一项或多项可以监听到其他设备(如终端100)发射的信号，如探测请求、扫描信号等等，并可以发送响应信号，如探测响应、扫描响应等，使得其他设备(如终端100)可以发现显示设备200，并与其他设备(如终端100)建立无线通信连接，通过蓝牙、WLAN或红外线中的一种或多种无线通信技术与其他设备(如终端100)进行通信。
在另一些实施例中，蓝牙通信模块203A、WLAN通信模块203B、红外线通信模块203C中的一项或多项也可以发射信号，如广播蓝牙信号、信标信号，使得其他设备(如终端100)可以发现显示设备200，并与其他设备(如电子设备100)建立无线通信连接，通过蓝牙或WLAN中的一种或多种无线通信技术与其他设备(如电子设备100)进行通信。
无线通信模块203还可以包括蜂窝移动通信模块(未示出)。蜂窝移动通信处理模块可以通过蜂窝移动通信技术与其他设备(如服务器)进行通信。
显示设备200的无线通信功能可以通过天线204，无线通信模块203，调制解调处理器等实现。
天线204可用于发射和接收电磁波信号。显示设备200中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用，以提高天线的利用率。例如：可以将WLAN通信模块203B的天线复用为蓝牙通信模块203A的天线。在另外一些实施例中，天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
在一些实施例中蓝牙通信模块203A的天线可以有一个或多个，当蓝牙通信模块203A的天线3根及以上时，即可实现显示设备200测量终端100发送的蓝牙信号的到达角度(angle of arrival，AoA)。
电源开关205可用于控制电源向显示设备200的供电。
有线LAN通信处理模块206可用于通过有线LAN和同一个LAN中的其他设备进行通信，还可用于通过有线LAN连接到WAN，可与WAN中的设备通信。
HDMI通信处理模块207可用于通过HDMI接口(未示出)与其他设备进行通信。
USB通信处理模块208可用于通过USB接口(未示出)与其他设备进行通信。
显示屏209可用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏129可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)显示屏，有源矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode，AMOLED)显示屏，柔性发光二极管(flexible light-emitting diode，FLED)显示屏，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)显示屏等等。
音频模块210可用于通过音频输出接口输出音频信号，这样可使得显示设备200支持音频播放。音频模块还可用于通过音频输入接口接收音频数据。显示设备200可以为电视机等媒体播放设备。
在一些实施例中，显示设备200还可以包括RS-232接口等串行接口。该串行接口可连接至其他设备，如音箱等音频外放设备，使得显示器和音频外放设备协作播放音视频。
可以理解的是图2A示意的结构并不构成对显示设备200的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，显示设备200可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
本申请实施例所述的方法中，显示设备200的使用的蓝牙协议框架可以参考上述图1B所示，在此不再赘述。
显示设备200还可以包括有磁力计211，又可称为电子罗盘、指南针，可用于检测磁场强度以及方向。
图2B示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的音频设备220的结构示意图。
下面以音频设备220为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是，图2B所示音频设备220仅是一个范例，并且音频设备220可以具有比图2B中所示的更多或更少的部件，可以组合两个或多个的部件，或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现，
如图2B所示，音频设备220可以包括：处理器221，存储器222，蓝牙通信模块223，天线224，电源开关225，USB通信处理模块226，音频模块227。其中：
处理器221可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体实现中，处理器221可主要包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。其中，控制器主要负责指令译码，并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中，处理器221的硬件架构可以是专用集成电路(ASIC)架构、MIPS架构、ARM架构或者NP架构等等。
在一些实施例中，处理器221可以用于解析蓝牙通信处理模块223接收到的信号，等等。处理221可以用于根据解析结果进行相应的处理操作等等。
存储器222与处理器221耦合，用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中，存储器222可包括高速随机存取的存储器，并且也可包括非易失性存储器，例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器222可以存储操作系统，例如uCOS，VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器222还可以存储通信程序，该通信程序可用于与终端100，一个或多个服务器，或其他设备进行通信。
蓝牙通信模块223可以包括经典蓝牙(BT)模块和低功耗蓝牙(BLE)模块，
在一些实施例中，蓝牙通信模块223、可以监听到其他设备(如终端100)发射的信号，如探测请求、扫描信号等等，并可以发送响应信号、扫描响应等，使得其他设备(如终端100)可以发现音频设备220，并与其他设备(如终端100)建立无线通信连接，通过蓝牙与其他设备(如终端100)进行通信。
在另一些实施例中，蓝牙通信模块223也可以发射信号，如广播BLE信号，使得其他设备(如终端100)可以发现音频设备220，并与其他设备(如终端100)建立无线通信连接，通过蓝牙与其他设备(如终端100)进行通信。
音频设备220的无线通信功能可以通过天线224，蓝牙通信模块223，调制解调处理器等实现。
天线224可用于发射和接收电磁波信号。音频设备220中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。
在一些实施例中蓝牙通信模块223的天线224可以有三个。
电源开关225可用于控制电源向音频设备220的供电。
USB通信处理模块206可用于通过USB接口(未示出)与其他设备进行通信。
音频模块226可用于通过音频输出接口输出音频信号，这样可使得音频设备220支持音频播放。音频模块还可用于通过音频输入接口接收音频数据。音频设备220可以为蓝牙耳机等媒体播放设备。
在一些实施例中，音频设备220还可以包括显示屏(未示出)，其中，该显示屏可用于显示图像，提示信息等。显示屏可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode，OLED)显示屏，有源矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode，AMOLED)显示屏，柔性发光二极管(flexible light-emitting diode，FLED)显示屏，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes，QLED)显示屏等等。
在一些实施例中，音频设备220还可以包括RS-232接口等串行接口。该串行接口可连接至其他设备，如音箱等音频外放设备，使得音频设备220和音频外放设备协作播放音视频。
音频设备220还可以包括有磁力计228，又可称为电子罗盘、指南针，可用于检测磁场强度以及方向。
可以理解的是图2B示意的结构并不构成对音频设备220的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，音频设备220可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。
本申请实施例所述的方法中，音频设备220使用的蓝牙协议框架可以参考上述图1B所示，在此不再赘述。
下面介绍本申请的相关技术中的数据分享过程。
以分享图片类文件为例：
1、首先，用户需要打开终端上的图库应用的用户界面。
图3A示例性示出了智能手机等终端显示的图库应用的用户界面310。“图库”是智能手机、平板电脑等终端上的一款图片管理的应用程序，又可以被称为“相册”。其中，该图库应用的用户界面310中包括有一个或多张图片的缩略图。
2、用户打开图库应用中的图片展示界面。
终端可以接收用户针对图3A中缩略图311的输入操作(例如单击)，响应于该输入操作，终端可以显示如图3B所示的图片展示界面320。
如图3B所示，该图片展示界面320中包括有图片326、分享按钮321、收藏按钮322、编辑按钮323、删除按钮324、更多按钮325。该图片326可以有标题，例如，“2019年7月15日”。其中，分享按钮321可用于触发打开图片分享界面。收藏按钮322可用于触发收藏该图片326到图片收藏文件夹。编辑按钮323可用于触发对图片326的旋转、修剪、 增加滤镜、虚化等编辑功能。删除按钮324可用于触发删除该图片326。更多按钮325可用于触发打开更多与图片相关的功能。
3、用户点选图片展示界面中的分享按钮，打开图片分享界面。
终端可以接收用户针对图3B中分享按钮321的输入操作(例如单击)，响应于该输入操作，终端可以显示如图3C所示的文件分享界面330。
如图3C所示，该文件分享界面330包括区域331、区域337和区域339。其中：
区域331可用于显示图库中的一个或多个图片或视频，这一个或多个图片或视频中可以包括用户选择的图片或视频，例如已选定图片332。其中，已选定图片332上可以显示有标记334，标记334可用于表示其对应的图片332被终端选定(也即图片已被用户选择)。区域331中还可以显示有控件335和控件336，上述两个控件(控件335和控件336)可用于切换或更新区域331中显示的图片。该区域331中显示的图片或视频画面可以是缩略图。区域331中显示的图片或视频画面对应的原图可以存储于终端上。
区域337可用于显示终端发现的附近设备选项，以及一个或多个用户选项。该用户选项对应终端发现的附近设备。其中，终端在正在搜索附近的设备时们可以在区域337中显示搜索提示338(例如，“正在发现附近的设备，对方需要开启蓝牙、WLAN”等文字提示)。
区域339中可以显示有一个或多个服务选项(例如，微信图标、朋友圈图标、推特图标、脸书图标、邮件图标、QQ图标、信息图标、WLAN直连图标，等)。服务选项对应的应用程序或协议可支持分享用户选择的图片至联系人或服务器。用户可以通过服务选项对应的应用程序或协议进行数据分享。例如将选择的图片分享至微信的一个或多个联系人，又例如将选择的图片分享至脸书的动态发布平台(即服务器)。
4、用户可在终端搜索到附近的设备后，点击图片分享界面中的附近设备选项，分享选中的图片给附近设备。
如图3D所示，终端在搜索到附近的设备后可以在区域337中显示附近设备选项或附近设备对应的用户选项，例如，用户选项341(用户名称为“Lisa”)。
终端可以接收用户针对该用户选项341的输入操作(例如单击)，响应于该输入操作，终端可以与该用户选项341对应的设备建立通信连接，然后通过该通信连接向该用户选项对应的设备传输已选定的图片。
通过上述相关技术中的数据分享过程，可以看出，用户在终端上分享图片等文件给附近设备的操作过程比较繁琐，影响用户体验。
因此，本申请提供一种数据分享的方法，终端可以通过在文件展示界面(例如，显示有图片、视频和文档等文件对象的展示界面)中接收用户的滑动操作，并检测该滑动操作的滑动方向。终端可以响应于该滑动操作，通过低功耗蓝牙(Bluetooth Low Energy，BLE)AoA测量技术，测量附近设备相对于终端的方向位置(包括方向和距离)。然后，终端可以确定出相对于终端的方向与上述滑动操作的滑动方向一致且最近的附近设备，并将该文件展示界面中的文件对象发送给方向位置与滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的附近设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)的操作步骤，给用户提供了方便。
下面结合应用场景，介绍本申请中提供的一种数据分享的方法。
首先，介绍一种应用场景中的系统架构图。
请参照图4，为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构图。如图4所示，该系统40包括有终端100和附近设备。附近设备包括终端101、终端102和终端103，等等。其中，该图4中示例性的示出了本申请的一些应用场景中，终端100与终端101在终端102、终端103的在水平面上的位置关系。
在本申请的后续实施例中，为了便于说明终端100与附近设备的位置关系，可以将设备的上的以参考点(例如，可以是中心位置点)表示其在平面图中的位置。例如，可以用终端100的中心位置点，代表其在水平面中的位置。本申请实施例中，可以将终端100的中心位置点为起始点垂直于终端100触控屏的上边缘的向量所指方向，作为终端100的基准方向，也可以称为终端100的0度方向。
因此，如图4所示，终端101可以在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，终端102可以在终端100的顺时针45度方向1.2m处，终端103可以在终端100的顺时针90度方向0.5m处。
在本申请实施例中，终端100的附近设备可以不限于上述图4中的三个，还可以有更多或更少，图4中只是示例性的以三个附近设备解释本申请，不应构成限定。上述图4中示例性的示出了上述三个附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)与终端100的相对位置关系，仅仅示例性的解释本申请实施例，不应构成限定。
上述图4中的终端100、终端101、终端102和终端103可以是智能手机、平板电脑等终端。其中，终端100的结构示意图可以参考上述图1A所示实施例。终端101、终端102和终端103的结构也可以参考终端100，且终端101、终端102和终端103，在此不再赘述。
在一些应用场景中，用户在触发打开图片、视频、文档等文件后，可以在图片、视频、文档等文件对象的展示界面上，通过滑动操作(例如三指滑动)，将该图片或视频等文件对象发送给与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且该方向上最近的附近设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据的操作步骤，提高分享文件数据给附近设备的效率。
在图5A-图5J示例性示出的UI实施例中，用户可以触发打开终端100上图库应用中的图片后，通过滑动操作，将该图片发送给与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且较近的附近设备。
如图5A所示，终端100可以显示有主屏幕的界面510，该界面510中显示了一个放置有应用图标的页面，该页面包括多个应用图标(例如，天气应用图标、股票应用图标、计算器应用图标、设置应用图标512A、邮件应用图标、支付宝应用图标、脸书应用图标、浏览器应用图标、图库应用图标512B、音乐应用图标512C、视频应用图标、微信应用图标512D、查找我的设备应用图标512E，等等)。多个应用图标下方还显示包括有页面指示符，以表明当前显示的页面与其他页面的位置关系。页面指示符的下方有多个托盘图标(例如拨号应用图标、信息应用图标、联系人应用图标、相机应用图标)，托盘图标在页面切换时保持显示。在一些实施例中，上述页面也可以包括多个应用图标和页面指示符，页面指示符可以不是页面的一部分，单独存在，上述图片图标也是可选的，本申请实施例对此不作 限制。在该界面510的上方部分区域显示有状态栏511，该状态栏511可以包括：移动通信信号(又可称为蜂窝信号)的一个或多个信号强度指示符，电池状态指示符，时间指示符，等等。当终端开启蓝牙功能后，该状态栏511中还可以显示出蓝牙开启指示符。在托盘图标下方显示有导航栏516，该导航栏516可包括：返回按键517、主界面(Home screen)按键518、呼出任务历史按键519等等系统导航键。当检测到用户点击返回按键517时，终端100可显示当前页面的上一个页面。当检测到用户点击主界面按键518时，终端100可显示主界面。当检测到用户点击呼出任务历史按键519时，终端100可显示用户最近打开的任务。各导航键的命名还可以为其他，本申请对此不做限制。不限于虚拟按键，导航栏516中的各导航键也可以实现为物理按键。在一些实施例中，导航栏516也是可选的，用户可以通过其他操作完成导航栏516中各导航键的功能。
终端100可以接收到用户作用于该图库应用图标512B的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，该终端100可以显示如图5B所示的图库应用界面520。
如图5B所示，该图库应用界面520中包括有一个或多个相册选项(例如，所有照片相册521、视频相册522、相机相册、截屏目录相册、微信相册、微博相册，等等)。其中，每个相册选项下方都有该相册的名称及相册中照片和/或视频数目。例如，所有照片相册521中包括有2160张照片，视频相册522中包括有6个视频。该图库应用界面520中还包括有新建相册控件523。该新建相册控件523可用于触发在图库应用界面520中建立新的相册。
终端100可以接收用户作用于该所有照片相册521的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图5C所示的相册界面530。
如图5C所示，该相册界面530的标题可以是“所有照片”。该相册界面530中包括有一个或多张图片的缩略图(例如，缩略图531)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于缩略图531的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图5D所示的图片展示界面540。
如图5D所示，该图片展示界面540的标题可以是“2019年7月15日”。图片展示界面540中显示包括有图片541和菜单547。其中，该菜单547中包括有分享按钮542、收藏按钮543、编辑按钮544、删除按钮545、更多按钮546。分享按钮542可用于触发打开文件分享界面(参考上述图3C中的文件分享界面330)。收藏按钮543可用于触发收藏该图片541到图片收藏文件夹。编辑按钮544可用于触发对图片541的旋转、修剪、增加滤镜、虚化等编辑功能。删除按钮545可用于触发删除该图片541。更多按钮546可用于触发打开更多与该图片541相关的功能。
在一些实施例中，该菜单547为可选的。该菜单547可以在该图片展示界面540中隐藏，例如，用户单击图片541可以隐藏该菜单547，再次单击图片541可以显示该菜单547，本申请不作限制。
如图5E所示，终端100可以接收用户作用于图片展示界面540的滑动操作，例如，当终端100的触控屏支持多点触控屏时，该滑动操作可以是三根手指触摸触控屏滑动，不限于此，该滑动操作还可以是双指触摸滑动、指关节触摸滑动、手指按压滑动，等等。其中，该滑动操作的起始位置可以在图片展示界面540的任意位置，例如，可以是在图片展示界面540中的图片541位置处，也可以在其他位置，不作限定。该滑动操作的滑动方向可以 由滑动操作的起始位置和终点位置确定，其轨迹可以是曲线，可以是直线，本申请不作限制。响应于该滑动操作，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE到达角(angle of arrival，AoA)测量附近设备相对于终端100的方向位置。终端100可以根据附近设备的方向位置，再从附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)中确定出与滑动方向(例如滑动方向为终端100的顺时针90度方向，即终端100正右方向)一致且较近的接收设备(例如，接收设备为终端103)。
在本申请实施例中，接收设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向可以有一定的误差，也即是说，当接收设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向的夹角小于指定角度阈值(例如15度)时，即可以认为接收设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向一致。
终端100在确定出接收设备后，可以显示如图5F所示的提示框548，用于请求用户确认是否发送该图片541给接收设备(例如终端103)。
如图5F所示，在终端100确定出接收设备(例如为终端103)后，终端100可以显示提示框548。该提示框548用于请求用户确认是否发送图片541给接收设备。该提示框548中包括有确认按钮549A和取消按钮549B。其中，该确认按钮549A用于触发终端100发送图片541给接收设备。该取消按钮549B用于触发终端100取消发送图片541给接收设备。其中，该提示框548中可以显示有接收设备的设备名称，用于让用户确认该接收设备是否符合预期。由于，终端100确定出的接收设备为终端103，终端100可以显示终端103的设备名称(例如，终端103的设备名称为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”)。例如，该提示框548中可以显示有“是否将该图片发送给‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’”等文字信息。该提示框548中还可以显示有该图片541的数据大小信息(例如“共8M”)，用于提示用户该图片541的数据大小。
终端100可以接收用户作用于提示框548中确认按钮549A的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图5G所示的进度栏550。其中，该图片分享请求用于请求接收设备接收终端100分享的图片541。
在一些实施例中，上述图5F中终端100显示的提示框548为可选的，终端100也可以在确定出接收设备后，不显示该提示框548，无需用户在终端100上确认，直接通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图5G中所示的进度栏550。这样，只需用户在接收设备上同意接收，就可以直接发送该图片541给接收设备。
在一些实施例中，上述图5G中所述的进度栏550为可选的，终端100可以不显示该进度栏550。终端100也可以在显示出该进度栏550后，接收用户针对该进度栏550的操作，隐藏该进度栏550，例如，该进度栏550可以隐藏在终端100的下拉通知窗口中，若用户想再次查看该进度栏550，可以通过接收用户在状态栏上的滑动操作，调取出通知窗口以查看该进度栏550。本申请实施例中，进度栏550的显示位置或显示方式，可以适用于后续实施例中提及的各种进度栏，后续实施例中将不再赘述。
如图5G所示，终端100上显示的该进度栏550中可以显示有文字信息551，用于提示用户该图片541的名称、接收设备的名称和图片541的数据大小等信息。例如，该文字信息551可以为“图片‘2019年7月15日’待发送至‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’(共8M)”等文 字信息。该进度栏550中还可以包括有进度条552和取消按钮553。其中，该进度条552可用于显示终端100发送图片541的进度。该取消按钮553可用于触发终端100取消对图片541的发送。
如图5G所示，接收设备可以是终端103。终端103接收到终端100发送的图片分享请求后，可以显示出提示框560。其中，该提示框560中包括有接收按钮561和拒绝按钮562。该接收按钮561可用于触发终端103接收设备100发送的图片541。该拒绝按钮562可用于触发终端103拒绝接收设备100发送的图片541。
接收设备(例如终端103)可以接收用户作用于接收按钮561的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，接收设备(例如终端103)可以发送接收响应给终端100。终端100在接收到该接收响应后，可以通过Wi-Fi直连(例如无线高保真点对点(wireless fidelity peer to peer，Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP、超宽带(ultra-wideband，UWB)等通信技术发送该图片541给接收设备(例如，终端103)。其中，在发送该图片541的过程中，终端100上的进度条552显示的进度会随着传输进程变化，例如，终端100还未开始传输该图片541时该进度条552上显示的进度为“0％”，传输完成时该进度条552上显示的进度为“100％”。
如图5H所示，接收设备为终端103。终端100在将图片541发送给接收设备终端103后，终端103可以直接显示图片563，或者，经过用户确认之后再显示该图片563。其中，该终端103上显示的图片563来源于终端100，与终端100上显示的图片541为同一图片文件。其中，该图片563在接收设备(例如，终端103)上显示的尺寸大小会根据接收设备(例如、终端103)的显示屏自适应调节。
在一些实施例中，上述提示框560为可选的。接收设备可以在接收到终端100发送的第一个文件对象(例如图片)的数据(例如图片)分享请求时，显示提示框560，并接收用户针对接收按钮561的确认操作，与接收设备建立文件传输连接(例如Wi-Fi P2P、Wi-Fi softAP，UWB，等)。若接收设备在一段时间(例如15秒)后，再次接收到终端100发送的第二个文件对象(例如图片)时，接收设备可以不显示该提示框560，无需用户确认，直接接收设备100发送的第二个文件对象(例如图片，视频、文档)。本申请实施例中，对接收设备上所显示的提示框560的文字描述，可以适用于后续实施例中提及的接收设备上显示的进度栏，后续实施例中未详述的部分可以参考此处。
在一些实施例中，当接收设备(例如终端103)接收到了终端100发送的数据分享请求后，接收设备(例如终端103)可以响应于用户的操作，拒绝接收设备100发送的图片数据。
示例性的，如图5I所示，接收设备为终端103。终端103可以接收用户作用于拒绝按钮562的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端103可以发送拒绝响应给终端100。
如图5J所示，终端100在接收到终端103发送的拒绝响应后，可以在进度栏550中更新显示提示信息555。其中，该提示信息555可以是“‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’已拒绝接收您发送的图片(共8M)”。
在图6A-图6G示例性示出的UI实施例中，用户可以触发打开终端100上的视频文件的展示界面后，通过滑动操作，将该视频文件发送给与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且该方向上最近的附近设备。
如图6A所示，终端100可以显示有图库应用界面610。其中，该图库应用界面610中包括有一个或多个相册选项(例如，所有照片相册611、视频相册612、相机相册、截屏目录相册、微信相册、微博相册，等等)以及新建相册控件613等。
其中，图6A所示的图库应用界面610与上述图5B所示的图库应用界面520相同，因此，上述图5B中针对图库应用界面520的文字说明，也同样适用于图6A中的图库应用界面610，在此不再赘述。
终端100可以接收用户作用于视频相册612的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图6B所示的视频相册界面620。
如图6B所示，该视频相册界面620的标题可以是“视频”。该视频相册界面620中包括有一个或多个视频文件选项(例如，视频文件选项621)。
终端100可以接收用户最用于视频文件选项621的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图6C所示的视频展示界面630。
如图6C所示，该视频展示界面630的标题可以是“旅行”，也即该视频文件对应的标题为“旅行”。该视频展示界面630中显示包括有视频文件631、播放按钮638和菜单637。该播放按钮638可用于触发播放该视频文件631。其中，该菜单637中包括有分享按钮632、收藏按钮633、编辑按钮634、删除按钮645、更多按钮646。分享按钮642可用于触发打开文件分享界面(参考上述图3C中的文件分享界面330)。收藏按钮633可用于触发收藏该视频文件631到视频收藏文件夹。编辑按钮634可用于触发对视频画面631的裁剪、等编辑功能。删除按钮635可用于触发删除该视频文件631。更多按钮636可用于触发打开更多与该视频文件631相关的功能。
在一些实施例中，该菜单637为可选的。该菜单637可以在该视频展示界面630中隐藏，例如，用户单击视频文件631可以隐藏该菜单637，再次单击视频文件631可以显示该菜单637，本申请不作限制。
如图6D所示，终端100可以接收用户作用于视频展示界面630的滑动操作，例如，该滑动操作可以是三根手指触发触控屏滑动。其中，该滑动操作的起始位置可以在图片展示界面540的任一位置，不作限定。该滑动操作的滑动方向可以由滑动操作的起始位置和终点位置确定，其轨迹可以是曲线，可以是直线，本申请不作限制。响应于该滑动操作，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE AoA测量附近设备相对于终端100的方向位置。终端100可以根据附近设备的方向位置，再从附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)中确定出与滑动方向(例如滑动方向为终端100的顺时针90度方向，即终端100正右方向)一致且较近的接收设备(例如，接收设备为终端103)。
终端100在确定出接收设备后，可以显示如图6E所示的提示框640，用于请求用户确认是否发送视频文件631给终端100确定出的接收设备(例如，接收设备为终端103)。
如图6E所示，在终端100确定出接收设备(例如终端103)后，终端100可以输出提示框640。该提示框640用于请求用户确认是否发送视频文件631给接收设备。该提示框 640中包括有确认按钮641和取消按钮642。其中，该确认按钮641用于触发终端100发送视频文件641给接收设备。该取消按钮642用于触发终端100取消发送视频文件631给接收设备。其中，该提示框640中可以显示有接收设备的设备名称，用于让用户确认该接收设备是否符合预期。由于，终端100确定出的接收设备为终端103，终端100可以显示终端103的设备名称(例如，终端103的设备名称为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”)。例如，该提示框640中可以显示有“是否将该视频发送给‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’”等文字信息。该提示框640中还可以显示有该视频文件631的大小信息(例如共“82M”)，用于提示用户该视频文件631的数据大小。
终端100可以接收用户作用于提示框640中确认按钮641的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以通过BLE发送视频分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图6F所示的进度栏650。其中，该视频分享请求用于请求接收设备接收终端100分享的视频文件631。
在一些实施例中，上述图6E中终端100显示的提示框640为可选的，终端100也可以在确定出接收设备后，不显示该提示框640，无需用户在终端100上确认，直接通过BLE发送视频分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图6F中所示的进度栏650。这样，只需用户在接收设备上同意接收，就可以直接发送该视频文件631给接收设备。
如图6F所示，该进度栏650中可以显示有视频文件631的名称、接收设备的名称和视频文件631的数据大小等信息。例如，进度栏650中显示有“视频文件‘旅行’待发送至‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’(共82M)”等文字信息。该进度栏650中还可以包括有进度条652和取消按钮653。其中，该进度条652可用于显示终端100发送视频文件631的进度。该取消按钮653可用于触发取消对视频文件631的发送。
如图6F所示，接收设备可以是终端103。终端103接收到终端100发送的视频分享请求后，可以显示出提示框660。其中，该提示框660中包括有接收按钮661和拒绝按钮662。改接收按钮661可用于触发接收设备100发送的视频文件631。该拒绝按钮662可用于触发拒绝接收设备100发送的视频文件631。
接收设备(例如终端103)可以接收用户作用于接收按钮661的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，接收设备可以发送接收响应给终端100。终端100在接收到该接收响应后，可以通过Wi-Fi直连(例如Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP、UWB等通信技术发送视频文件631给接收设备(例如，终端103)。其中，在发送该图片541的过程中，终端100上的进度条552显示的进度会随着传输进程变化，例如，终端100还未开始传输该图片541时该进度条552上显示的进度为“0％”，传输完成时该进度条552上显示的进度为“100％”。
如图6G所示，接收设备为终端103。终端100在将视频文件631发送给终端103后，终端103可以直接显示视频文件663，或者，经过用户确认之后再显示该视频文件663。其中，该终端103上显示的视频文件663来源于终端100，与终端100上显示的视频文件631为同一视频文件。终端103可以在视频文件663上显示播放按钮664，该播放按钮664用于触发终端103播放该视频文件663。
在一些实施例中，上述提示框660为可选的。接收设备可以在接收到终端100发送的 第一个文件对象(例如视频文件)的数据(例如视频文件)分享请求时，显示提示框560，并接收用户针对接收按钮561的确认操作，与接收设备建立文件传输连接(例如Wi-Fi P2P、Wi-Fi softAP，UWB，等)。若接收设备在一段时间(例如15秒)后，再次接收到终端100发送的第二个文件对象(例如视频文件)时，接收设备可以不显示该提示框560，无需用户确认，直接接收设备100发送的第二个文件对象(例如视频文件)。
在一些应用场景中，用户在触发打开图片、视频、文档等文件后，可以在图片、视频、文档等文件的展示界面上，先触发终端100测量并显示附近设备的方向位置。然后，用户可以通过滑动操作，拖动图片、视频、文档等文件至附近设备的位置，以发送图片、视频、文档等文件给附近设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据的操作步骤，提高文件数据分享的效率。
在图7A-图7F示例性示出的UI实施例中，以图片文件为例，用户可以在图片文件的展示界面上，先触发终端100在触控屏上显示一个或多个附近设备的方向位置。然后，用户可以通过滑动操作，在触控屏上拖动图片文件至附近设备的位置处，以发送图片给附近设备。
如图7A所示，终端100可以显示有图片展示界面710。该图片展示界面710的标题可以是“2019年7月15日”。图片展示界面710中显示包括有图片711和菜单717。其中，该菜单717中包括有分享按钮712、收藏按钮713、编辑按钮714、删除按钮715、更多按钮716。分享按钮712可用于触发打开文件分享界面(参考上述图3C中的文件分享界面330)。收藏按钮713可用于触发收藏该图片711到图片收藏文件夹。编辑按钮714可用于触发对图片711的旋转、修剪、增加滤镜、虚化等编辑功能。删除按钮715可用于触发删除该图片716。更多按钮716可用于触发打开更多与该图片711相关的功能。
在一些实施例中，该菜单717为可选的。该菜单717可以在该图片展示界面710中隐藏，例如，用户单击图片711可以隐藏该菜单717，再次单击图片711可以显示该菜单717，本申请不作限制。
终端100可以接收用户作用于图片711的触摸操作，例如，该触摸操作可以是用户手指按住(例如，三指长按)图片711，不限于三指长按，还可以是双指长按、单指长按，本申请在此不作限定，等等。响应于该触摸操作，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE搜索附近设备，并通过BLE AoA测量附近设备的方向位置(包括方向和距离)。
如图7B所示，例如，当终端100三指长按图片711时，该图片711可以缩小显示，同时，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE搜索附近设备，并通过BLE AoA测量附近设备的方向位置(包括方向和距离)。在终端100搜索附近设备的过程中，终端100可以显示出搜索提示721，用于提示用户当前终端100正在搜索附近设备。该搜索提示721可以是“正在搜索附近设备”等文字信息，不限于此，该搜索提示721还可以是图标类等信息。
如图7C所示，在终端100搜索到附近设备且测量出附近设备的方向位置后，终端100可以在该图片展示界面710上显示附近设备相对于终端100的方向位置。其中，附近设备可以有终端101、终端102和终端103。该终端101的设备名称可以为“Verseau”，该终端102的设备名称可以为“Daniel”，该终端103的设备名称可以为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”。
其中，终端100测量出的附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)的方向位置可以参考上述图4示例性示出的终端100与附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)的位置关系。终端101可以在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，终端102可以在终端100的顺时针45度方向1.2m处，终端103可以在终端100的顺时针90度方向0.5m处。
如图7C所示，终端100可以在图片展示界面710上显示出自身的位置标记725，终端101的位置标记722、终端102的位置标记723和终端103的位置标记724。其中，终端100的位置标记725与附近设备的位置标记之间的位置关系可以参考终端100与附近设备的位置关系。
其中，各位置标记(位置标记722、位置标记723、位置标记724、位置标记725)之间的距离可以根据终端100与附近设备的距离，按照一定比例进行缩放。附近设备的位置标记(位置标记723、位置标记724和位置标记725)相对于位置标记725的方向，与附近设备相对于终端100的方向相同。
例如，缩放比例可以是1:40。由于终端101在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，该位置标记722可以在该位置标记725的顺时针315度方向2cm处。由于终端102在终端100的顺时针45度方向1.2m处，该位置标记723可以在该位置标记725的顺时针45度方向3cm处。由于终端103在终端100的顺时针45度方向0.5m处，该位置标记724可以在该位置标记725的顺时针90度方向1.25cm处。以上示例仅仅用于解释本申请，在此不作限定。
如图7C所示，在终端100显示出各附近设备的位置标记(位置标记722、位置标记723、位置标记724)后，终端100可以接收用户作用于图片711的滑动操作。其中，该滑动操作可以是用户手指按住(例如三指按住)图片711向终端100的顺时针90度方向滑动。
如图7D所示，当用户滑动手指的过程中，该图片711可以跟随用户的手指在触控屏上的触摸点移动。在一种实现方式中，图片711的显示尺寸会随着移动距离的增加而缩小。终端100可以根据该滑动操作的中滑动终点位置，确定出该图片711的接收设备。例如，当该滑动操作的中滑动终点位置在位置标记724处时，由于该位置标记724对应的设备为终端103，因此，终端100可以确定出接收设备为终端103。
在一种可能的实现方式中，用户选择接收设备的操作不限于上述图7C和图7D中所示作用于图片711的滑动操作，还可以是其他选择操作，不作限定。例如，终端100在测量出各附近设备的方向位置，并显示出各附近设备的位置标记后，可以接收用户作用于上述图7C中位置标记724的单击操作。响应于该单击操作，终端100可以确定出接收设备为该位置标记724对应的终端103。
终端100在确定出接收设备(例如为终端103)后，终端100可以通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图7E所示的进度栏730。其中，该图片分享请求用于请求接收设备接收终端100分享的图片711。
如图7E所示。终端100上显示的进度栏730中可以显示有文字信息731，用于提示用户图片711的名称、接收设备的名称和图片711的数据大小等信息。例如，该文字信息731可以是“图片‘2019年7月15日’待发送至‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’(共8M)”。该进度栏730中还可以包括有进度条732和取消按钮733。其中，该进度条732可用于显示终端100发 送该图片711的进度。该取消按钮733可用于触发取消对图片711的发送。
如图7E所示，接收设备可以是终端103。终端103接收到终端100发送的图片分享请求后，可以显示出提示框740。其中，该提示框740中包括有接收按钮741和拒绝按钮742。该接收按钮741可用于触发终端103接收该终端100发送的图片711。该拒绝按钮742可用于触发拒绝接收设备100发送的图片711。
接收设备(例如终端103)可以接收用户作用于接收按钮741的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，接收设备可以发送接收响应给终端100。终端100在接收到该接收响应后，可以通过Wi-Fi直连(Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP、超宽带(ultra-wideband，UWB)等通信技术发送该图片711给接收设备(例如，终端103)。其中，在发送该图片711的过程中，终端100上的进度条732显示的进度会随着传输进程变化，例如，终端100还未开始传输该图片711时该进度条732上显示的进度为“0％”，传输完成时该进度条732上显示的进度为“100％”。
如图7F所示，接收设备为终端103。终端100在将图片711发送给接收设备终端103后，终端103可以直接显示图片743，或者，经过用户确认之后再显示该图片743。其中，该终端103上显示的图片743来源于终端100，与终端100上显示的图片711为同一图片文件。其中，该图片743在接收设备(例如，终端103)上显示的尺寸大小会根据接收设备(例如、终端103)的显示屏自适应调节。
在一些应用场景中，用户可以在第三方应用(例如，微信应用、QQ应用)中的图片、视频、文档等文件的展示界面上，通过滑动操作(例如三指滑动)，将该图片或视频等文件发送给与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且该方向上最近的附近设备。这样，用户可以无需触发保存第三方应用中的文件至终端本地，再退出第三方应用在终端本地文件夹中触发分享该文件数据附近设备，简化了用户分享第三方应用中文件数据的操作步骤，提高了分享文件数据给附近设备的效率。
在图8A-图8G示例性示出的UI实施例中，以第三方应用是微信应用为例，示例性说明用户在第三方应用中的图片、视频、文档等文件的展示界面上，通过滑动操作(例如三指滑动)，将该图片或视频等文件发送给与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且该方向上最近的附近设备。
如图8A所示，终端100可以显示有主屏幕的界面510，该界面510中显示了一个放置有应用图标的页面，该页面包括多个应用图标(例如，天气应用图标、股票应用图标、计算器应用图标、设置应用图标512A、邮件应用图标、支付宝应用图标、脸书应用图标、浏览器应用图标、图库应用图标512B、音乐应用图标512C、视频应用图标、微信应用图标512D、查找我的设备应用图标512E，等等)。其中，针对该界面510的文字说明可以参考上述图5A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
终端100可以接收用户作用于微信应用图标512D的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图8B所示的微信应用界面810。
如图8B所示，该微信应用界面810中包括消息浏览页面811和菜单813。其中，该菜单813中包括有微信控件814、联系人控件815、发现控件816和我的控件817。其中，该 微信控件814用于触发终端100显示出该消息浏览页面811。该联系人控件815可用于触发终端100显示出包括有多个微信联系人选项的页面。该发现控件816可用于触发终端100显示包括有朋友圈、扫一扫等功能控件的页面。该我的控件817可用于触发终端100显示包括有微信用户的个人资料等信息的页面。该消息浏览页面811中包括有一个或多个消息选项(例如，联系人“MAC”的消息选项812、联系人“Kate”的消息选项、邮箱提醒的消息选项、订阅号的消息选项、联系人群组“吃货群”的消息选项、微信运动的消息选项、联系人群组“健身群”的消息选项)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于消息选项812的操作，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图8C所示的聊天界面820。
如图8C所示，该聊天界面820显示包括有联系人名称(例如“MAC”)、联系人头像821、聊天消息822、语音输入控件823、文字输入框824、表情控件825、更多功能控件826。其中，该聊天消息822中可以是图片、视频、文档等文件，图8C中仅以图片文件进行示例性说明，不应构成限定。语音输入控件823可用于触发终端100将文字输入框824替换显示为语音输入框。文字输入框824可用于显示用户输入的文字或表情图片。表情控件825可用于触发终端100显示出一个或多个可发送的表情图片。该更多功能控件826可用于触发终端100显示更多微信聊天功能控件(例如图片发送控件、视频发送控件、拍照发送控件，等等)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于该聊天消息822的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图8D所示的图片展示界面830。
如图8D所示，该图片展示界面830中包括有图片831和保存控件832。该保存控件832可用于触发终端100保存该图片831至本地的文件夹中。
终端100可以接收用户作用于图片展示界面830的滑动操作，例如，该滑动操作可以是用户三根手指触摸触控屏滑动。其中，该滑动操作的起始位置可以在图片展示界面830的任意位置，不作限定。该滑动操作的滑动方向可以由滑动操作的起始位置和终点位置确定，其轨迹可以曲线，可以是直线，本申请不作限制。响应于该滑动操作，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE AoA测量附近设备相对于终端100的方向位置。终端100可以根据附近设备的方向位置，再从附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)中确定出与滑动方向(例如滑动方向为终端100的顺时针90度方向，即终端100正右方向)一致且较近的接收设备(例如，接收设备为终端103)。
终端100在确定出接收设备后，可以通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图8E所示的提示框840，用于请求用户确认是否发送该图片831给接收设备(例如终端103)。
如图8E所示，在终端100确定出接收设备(例如为终端103)后，终端100可以输出提示框840。该提示框840用于请求用户确认是否发送图片831给接收设备。该提示框840中包括有确认按钮841和取消按钮842。其中，该确认按钮841用于触发终端100发送图片831给接收设备。该取消按钮842用于触发终端100取消发送图片831给接收设备。其中，该提示框840中可以显示有接收设备的设备名称，用于让用户确认该接收设备是否符合预期。由于，终端100确定出的接收设备为终端103，终端100可以显示终端103的设 备名称(例如，终端103的设备名称为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”)。例如，该提示框840中可以显示有“是否将该图片发送给‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’”等文字信息。该提示框840中还可以显示有该图片831的数据大小信息(例如“共8M”)，用于提示用户该图片831的数据大小。
终端100可以接收用户作用于提示框840中确认按钮841的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图8F所示的进度栏850。其中，该图片分享请求用于请求接收设备接收终端100分享的图片831。
在一些实施例中，上述图8E中终端100显示的提示框840为可选的，终端100也可以在确定出接收设备后，不显示该提示框840，无需用户在终端100上确认，直接通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图8E中所示的进度栏850。这样，只需用户在接收设备上同意接收，就可以直接发送该图片831给接收设备。
如图8F所示，终端100上显示的进度栏850中可以显示有文字信息851，用于提示接收设备的名称和图片831的数据大小等信息。例如，该文字信息831可以为“图片待发送至‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’(共8M)”等文字信息。该进度栏850中还可以包括有进度条852和取消按钮853。其中，该进度条852可用于显示终端100发送图片831的进度。该取消按钮853可用于触发终端100取消对图片831的发送。
如图8F所示，接收设备可以是终端103。终端103接收到终端100发送的图片分享请求后，可以显示出提示框840。其中，该提示框840中有接收按钮841和拒绝按钮842。该接收按钮84可用于触发终端103接收设备100发送的图片831。该拒绝按钮842可用于触发终端103拒绝接收设备100发送的图片831。
接收设备(例如终端103)可以接收用户作用于接收按钮841的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，接收设备(例如终端103)可以发送接收响应给终端100。终端100在接收到该接收响应后，可以先将该图片831保存至终端100本地文件夹。然后，终端100通过Wi-Fi直连(Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP、超宽带(ultra-wideband，UWB)等通信技术发送该图片831给接收设备(例如，终端103)。其中，在发送该图片831的过程中，终端100上的进度条852显示的进度会随着传输进程变化，例如，终端100还未开始传输该图片831时该进度条852上显示的进度为“0％”，传输完成时该进度条852上显示的进度为“100％”。
如图8G所示，接收设备为终端103。终端100在将图片831发送给接收设备终端103后，终端103可以直接显示图片863，或者，经过用户确认之后再显示该图片861。其中，该终端103上显示的图片863来源于终端100，与终端100上显示的图片831为同一图片文件。其中，该图片863在接收设备(例如，终端103)上显示的尺寸大小会根据接收设备(例如、终端103)的显示屏自适应调节。
在一些应用场景中，用户可以在选择要分享的图片、视频、文档等文件后，触发终端100测量并显示附近设备的方向位置(包括方向与距离)。然后，用户可以从附近设备中选择出文件的接收设备，以触发终端100将用户选中的文件发送给接收设备。这样，用户可以在通过终端100分享文件数据给附近设备时，知晓附近设备的位置，便于用户确定文件数据的接收设备。
在图9A-图9J示例性示出的UI实施例中，以视频文件为例，用户可以在数据分享界面(例如“华为分享”界面)上选中需要分享的视频文件后，触发终端100测量并显示一个或多个附近设备的方向位置。然后，用户可以从附近设备中选择出文件的接收设备，以触发终端100将用户选中的文件数据发送给接收设备。
其中，“华为分享(Huawei Share)”可支持用户分享数据至终端100附近的设备。附近的设备可以包括附近的打印机、附近的投影仪、附近的显示器等，还可以包括附近的手机、附近的平板电脑、附近的个人电脑等。开启“华为分享”可以是指开启WLAN或蓝牙中的一项或多项。“华为分享”功能被开启后，该电子设备可以通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi直连(如Wi-Fi p2p)、Wi-Fi softAP等、Wi-Fi LAN等通信技术发现该终端100附近的设备。在一些实施例中，“华为分享”功能还可以有其他的名称，例如“即时分享”等，在此不作限定。
如图9A所示，终端100可以显示有主屏幕的界面510，该界面510中显示了一个放置有应用图标的页面，该页面包括多个应用图标(例如，天气应用图标、股票应用图标、计算器应用图标、设置应用图标512A、邮件应用图标、支付宝应用图标、脸书应用图标、浏览器应用图标、图库应用图标512B、音乐应用图标512C、视频应用图标、微信应用图标512D、查找我的设备应用图标512E，等等)。其中，针对该界面510的文字说明可以参考上述图5A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
终端100可以接收用户作用于设置应用图标512A的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图9B所示的设置应用界面910。
如图9B所示，该设置应用界面910中包括有一个或多个设置条目(例如，无线和网络设备条目、设备连接设置条目911、应用和通知设置条目、电池设置条目、显示设置条目、声音设置条目、存储设置条目、安全和隐私设置条目、用户和账户设置条目，等等)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于该设备连接设置条目911的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图9C所示的设备连接设置界面920。
如图9C所示，该设备连接设置界面920包括有一个或多个选项(例如蓝牙选项、NFC选项、Huawei Beam选项、华为分享(Huawei Share)选项921、手机投屏选项、USB选项、打印选项，等等)。
终端1100可以接收用户作用于该华为分享选项921的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图9D所示的华为分享界面930。
如图9D所示，该华为分享界面930包括有用户信息条目931、可见性条目934、接收文件条目936、共享空间条目937、发文件控件938A、组播控件938B、打印控件938C、共享至电脑控件938D、一碰传控件938E。其中，该用户信息条目931用于显示用户头像932、用户名称933(例如“安茜”)以及设备名称(例如“HUAWEI Mate 20 Pro”)。该可见性条目934中包括有可见性开关控件935，用于触发终端100能够被其他设备发现。该接收文件条目936用于触发终端100显示通过“华为分享”功能接收到的文件。该共享控件条目937可用于触发终端100显示出其他设备或用户分享的文件数据。该发文件控件938A可用于触发终端100显示文件选择界面，供用户选择待发送的文件数据。该组播控件938B可用于触发终端100同时向多个附近设备发送文件数据。该打印控件938C可用于触发100发送文件到附近打印机打印。共享至电脑控件938D可用于触发终端100发送文件 数据至电脑上“华为分享”的客户端。一碰传控件938E可用于触发终端100通过NFC发送文件数据给其他设备。
终端100可以接收用户作用于发文件控件938A的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示出如图9E所示的文件选择界面940。
如图9E所示，该文件选择界面940的标题是可以是“选择文件”。该文件选择界面940上可以包括有一个或多个数据类型选项(例如图片类型选项941、视频类型选项942、应用类型选项943、文件类型选项944)显示区域945和发送控件949。其中，该图片类型选项941可用于触发终端100在显示区域945中显示一个或多个图片文件夹(例如“相机”文件夹946、“手机淘宝”文件夹、“截屏目录”文件夹、“我的收藏”文件夹)。其中，该“相机”文件夹946中包括有已选图片提示947和文件夹全选框948。该已选图片提示947可用于提示用户在该“相机”文件夹946中已选择的图片数量。该文件夹全选框948可用于触发选中该“相机”文件夹946中的所有照片。该视频类型选项942可用于触发终端100在显示区域945中显示一个或多个视频选项。该应用选项943可用于触发终端100在显示区域945中显示一个或多个应用数据选项。该文件选项944可用于触发终端100在显示区域945中显示一个或多个其他文件(例如文档、表格、幻灯片等文件)。
如图9F所示，在终端100接收用户作用于视频类型选项942的操作(例如单击)后，响应于该操作，终端100可以在显示区域945中显示一个或多个视频选项(例如，“美食课程”视频选项952、“海边漫步”视频选项953、“周末嗨翻天”视频选项954、“旅行”视频选项955、“夕阳”视频选项956、“朝露”视频选项957，等等)。终端100还可以在该显示区域945中显示有全选框951，用于触发终端100选中显示区域945中所有的视频选项。
终端100可以接收用户针对操作“旅行”视频选项955和“夕阳”视频选项956的操作(例如，单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以在“旅行”视频选项955和“夕阳”视频选项956都显示如图9G所示的标记958，用于提示用户当前已选择“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件和“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件。
如图9G所示，终端100在用户选择完待发送的文件数据(例如，“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件和“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件)后，可以在发送控件949中显示待发送文件数据的数据大小(例如122MB)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于该发送控件949的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图9H所示的文件发送界面960。同时，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE搜索附近设备，并通过BLE AoA测量附近设备的方向位置(包括方向和距离)。
如图9H所示，该文件发送界面960可以包括有附近设备选项962、联系人选项963和雷达图970。在终端100搜索到附近设备且测量出附近设备的方向位置后，终端100可以在雷达图970中显示出附近设备相对于终端100的方向位置。其中，附近设备可以有终端101、终端102和终端103。该终端101的设备名称可以为“Verseau”，该终端102的设备名称可以为“Daniel”，该终端103的设备名称可以为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”。
其中，终端100测量出的附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)的方向位置可以参考上述图4示例性示出的终端100与附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)的位置 关系。终端101可以在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，终端102可以在终端100的顺时针45度方向1.2m处，终端103可以在终端100的顺时针90度方向0.5m处。
如图9H所示，终端100可以在雷达图970上显示出自身的位置标记971，终端101的位置标记972、终端102的位置标记973和终端103的位置标记974。其中，终端100的位置标记971与附近设备的位置标记之间的位置关系可以参考终端100与附近设备的位置关系。
其中，各位置标记(位置标记971、位置标记972、位置标记973、位置标记974)之间的距离可以根据终端100与附近设备的距离，按照一定比例进行缩放。附近设备的位置标记(位置标记972、位置标记973和位置标记974)相对于位置标记971的方向，与附近设备相对于终端100的方向相同。
例如，缩放比例可以是1:40。由于终端101在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，该位置标记972可以在该位置标记961的顺时针315度方向2cm处。由于终端102在终端100的顺时针45度方向1.2m处，该位置标记973可以在该位置标记971的顺时针45度方向3cm处。由于终端103在终端100的顺时针45度方向0.5m处，该位置标记974可以在该位置标记971的顺时针90度方向1.25cm处。以上示例仅仅用于解释本申请，在此不作限定。
终端100可以接收用户作用于附近设备的位置标记的操作(例如用户单击位置标记974)，响应于该操作，终端100可以确定出接收设备(例如终端103)，并通过BLE发送图片分享请求给接收设备(例如终端103)，并显示如图9I所示的进度栏980。其中，该数据分享请求用于请求接收设备接收终端100分享的文件数据。
如图9I所示，终端100上显示的进度栏980中可以显示有文字信息981，用于提示用户已选中文件数据的名称、接收设备的名称和已选中文件数据的数据大小等信息。例如，该文字信息可以是“视频文件‘旅行’和‘夕阳’待发送至‘HUAWEI P30 Pro’(共122M)”。该进度栏980中还可以包括有进度条982和取消按钮983。其中，该进度条982可用于显示终端100发送已选中文件数据(例如“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件和“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件)的进度。该取消按钮983可用于触发取消对已选中文件数据的发送。
如图9I所示，接收设备可以是终端103。终端103接收到终端100发送的数据分享请求后，可以显示出提示框990。其中，该提示框990中包括有接收按钮991和拒绝按钮992。该接收按钮991可用于触发终端103接收该终端100发送的该文件数据。该拒绝按钮992可用于触发终端103拒绝接收该终端100发送的该文件数据。
接收设备(例如终端103)可以接收用户作用于接收按钮991的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，接收设备可以发送接收响应给终端100。终端100在接收到该接收响应后，可以通过Wi-Fi直连(Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP、超宽带(ultra-wideband，UWB)等通信技术发送该用户选中的文件数据(例如“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件和“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件)给接收设备(例如，终端103)。其中，在发送该文件数据的过程中，终端100上的进度条982显示的进度会随着传输进程变化，例如，终端100还未开始传输该文件数据时该进度条982上显示的进度为“0％”，传输完成时该进度条982 上显示的进度为“100％”。
如图9J所示，接收设备为终端103。终端100在将用户选中的文件数据(例如“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件和“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件)发送给终端103后，终端103可以直接显示“旅行”视频选项993和“夕阳”视频选项994，或者，经过用户确认之后再显示。其中，该终端103上显示的“旅行”视频选项993对应的视频文件来源于终端100，与终端100上“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件为同一视频文件。该终端103上显示的“夕阳”视频选项994对应的视频文件来源于终端100，与终端100上“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件为同一视频文件。
在一些实施例中，触发终端100显示上述图9D中所示的华为分享界面930的操作，不限于上述针对图9C所示的设备连接设置界面920中华为分享选项921的操作，终端100还可以响应于用户在主屏幕的操作调出菜单窗口，该菜单窗口包括有华为分享功能的开关控件。再响应于用户作用于该开关控件的操作，使得终端100显示出上述图9D中所示的华为分享界面930。这样，有助于简化用户发送文件数据给附近设备的操作步骤。
示例性，如图10A所示，终端100可以显示有主屏幕的界面510，针对该界面510的文字说明可以参考上述图5A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。终端100可以接收用户作用于状态栏511的滑动操作(例如向下滑动)，响应于该滑动操作，终端100可以显示出如图10B所示的菜单窗口1010。该菜单窗口1010中可以显示有一些功能的开关控件(例如，无线局域网(WLAN)开关控件、蓝牙开关控件、手电筒开关控件、响铃开关控件、自动旋转开关控件、华为分享(Huawei Share)开关控件1011，等等)。
如图10C所示，终端100可以接收用户作用于华为分享开关控件1011的操作(例如长按)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图10D所示的华为分享界面930。其中，图10D中所示的华为分享930与上述图9D中所示的华为分享界面930相同，因此，对于华为分享界面930的文字说明可以参考上述图9D所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，终端100不仅可以将用户选中的文件数据通过近距离通信技术分享给附近设备，还可以通过因特网(Internet)将用户选中的文件数据发送给华为分享应用中联系人的设备上。这样，可以方便用户选择通过近距离通信技术分享给附近设备，还是通过因特网不限距离的发送给联系人的设备上，简化了用户同时分享数据给附近设备和联系人的操作。
示例性，如图10E所示，终端100显示文件发送界面960。其中，针对该文件发送界面960的文字说明可以参考前述图9H所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
终端100可以接收用户作用于文件发送界面960中联系人选项963的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以在雷达图970的显示区域更新显示为如图10F所示的联系人列表1020。
如图10F所示，该联系人列表1020中包括有一个或多个联系人(例如，“魏婴”、“江澄”、“Andy”、“Anna”、“Bob”、“Britney”，等等)选项。其中，该一个或多个联系人选项对应的设备上具有同类型客户端的用户账号(例如，华为账号)。其中，每个联系人的选项 上都显示有联系人的用户名以及设备型号。例如，联系人选项1021上显示的联系人的用户名为“魏婴”，设备型号为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”。
终端100可以接收用户作用于该联系人选项1021的操作，响应于该操作，终端100可以将用户选中的文件数据发送给该联系人选项1021对应的设备。
如图10G所示，终端100在给联系人选项1021对应的设备发送文件数据的过程中可以显示进度框1022，用于提示用户文件发送的进度。
在一些应用场景中，当终端100的配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机、蓝牙音箱，等等)丢失在某个角落，用户无法通过肉眼查找到时，终端100可以通过BLE AoA技术测量附近设备的方向位置，并在触控屏上显示配件设备相对于终端100的方向位置。这样，可以帮助用户查找到附近的配件设备，提高用户体验。
示例性的，如图11A所示，终端100可以显示有主屏幕的界面510，针对该界面510的文字说明可以参考上述图5A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。终端100可以接收用户作用于查找我的设备应用512E的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图11B所示的应用界面1110。
如图11B所示，应用界面1110的标题可以是“查找我的设备”。该应用界面1110可以包括地图1120、位置刷新控件1111、一个或多个设备选项(例如，设备选项1112、和配件设备选项1113)。其中，该地图1120中包括有终端100的位置标记1121以及一个或多个配件设备的位置标记。例如，设备选项1112对应的设备可以为手机，其设备名称可以为“HUAWEI P30”。该设备选项1113对应的设备可以是蓝牙耳机，其设备名称可以为“HUAWEI Free Buds 2”。
其中，该地图1120中可以包括有终端100的位置标记(例如，位置标记1121)和一个或多个其他设备的位置标记(例如，位置标记1122、位置标记1123)。该位置标记1121可用于表示终端100当前的在地图1120中的位置。由于当前该手机“HUAWEI P30”可以将全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)位置发送至终端100，因此，该位置标记1122可用于表示该手机“HUAWEI P30”在地图1120中位置。由于当前该蓝牙耳机“HUAWEI Free Buds 2”无法将GPS位置发送至终端100或者该蓝牙耳机“HUAWEI Free Buds 2”无GPS定位功能。因此，该位置标记1123可用于表示该蓝牙耳机“HUAWEI Free Buds 2”上次与终端100断开连接时在地图1120中的位置。其中，上述位置刷新控件1111用于触发终端100更新显示终端100以及其他各设备的位置标记。
终端100可以接收用户作用于设备选项1113的操作，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图11C所示的设备查找界面1130。
如图11C所示，上述设备选项1113对应的设备可以是蓝牙耳机。该设备查找界面1130上的标题可以显示有该蓝牙耳机的名称，例如“HUAWEI Free Buds 2”。该设备查找界面1130中包括有地图1140、定位设备控件1131、播放声音控件1132、雷达图1133。其中，该地图1140中显示包括有终端100的位置标记1141和该蓝牙耳机的位置标记1142。其中，该位置标记1141用于表示终端100当前在地图1140中的位置，由于终端100无法获取到该蓝牙耳机的GPS位置，因此，该位置标记1142用于表示该蓝牙耳机与终端100断开连 接时在地图1140中的位置。
其中，该定位设备控件1131可用于触发终端100更新显示地图中终端100以及蓝牙耳机的位置标记。该播放声音控件1132可用于触发终端100发送声音播放请求给该蓝牙耳机，用于请求该蓝牙耳机播放声音。该雷达图控件1133可用于触发终端100通过BLE AoA测量附近设备的位置，并在雷达图中显示附近设备的位置。这样，通过BLE AoA测量附近设备的位置，可以在配件设备无法通过GPS定位的情况下，帮助用户找到配件设备。
如图11D所示，当终端100在移动的过程中，该地图1140中的位置标记1141在地图中的位置也会变化。在终端100移动到位置标记1142所表示地理位置的附近(例如相距2m内)时，终端100可以显示出提示信息1134，用于提示当前可以触发终端100在雷达图中显示配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)的位置。例如，该提示信息1134可以是文字提示(例如，“已到达配‘HUAWEI Free Buds 2’附近，您可以开启雷达图更精确查找该配件”)，不限于文字提示，该提示信息1134还可以图片提示，声音提示，等等。
终端100可以接收用户作用于雷达图控件1133的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图11E所示的雷达图界面1150。同时，终端100开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE搜索附近设备，并通过BLE AoA测量附近设备的方向位置(包括方向和距离)。
如图11E所示，该雷达图界面1150可以包括有雷达图1160、左耳静音控件1151、播放声音控件1152和右耳静音控件1153。其中，在终端100搜索到该配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)且测量出该蓝牙耳机的方向位置后，终端100可以在雷达图1160中显示出该配件设备相对于终端100的方向位置。其中，终端100可以在雷达图中显示出位置标记1161和位置标记1162。该位置标记1161可用于表示终端100自身在雷达图中的位置。该位置标记1162可用于表示配件设备(例如蓝牙设备)在雷达图1160中的位置。
其中，该位置标记1161与位置标记1162的位置关系可以参考终端100与该配件设备的位置关系，该位置标记1161与位置标记1162之间的距离可以根据终端100与附近设备的距离，按照一定比例进行缩放。位置标记1162相对于位置标记1161的方向，与附近设备相对于终端100的方向相同。
例如，缩放比例可以是1:50。由于配件设备可以在终端100的顺时针方向270度方向1m处，该位置标记1162可以在该位置标记1161的顺时针270度方向2cm处。以上示例仅仅用于解释本申请，在此不作限定。
在一些实施例中，终端100还可以通过BLE广播发送声音播放请求给配件设备，用于请求配件设备播发声音。这样，可以让用户听声辩位，快速找到配件设备位置。
示例性的，如图11E所示，终端100可以接收用户作用于播放声音控件1152的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以发送声音播放请求给配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)。配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)可以响应于该声音播放请求，播放指定声音(例如一段音乐、一段语音，等等)。
如图11F所示，配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)接收到声音播放请求后，可以返回声音播放响应给终端100。终端100接收到声音播放响应后，可以在显示出提示信息1155，并在将播放声音控件1152替换显示为停止播放控件1154。该提示信息1155可用于提示用户当前该配件设备正在播放声音。其中，该提示信息1155可以是文字类提示，例如，“HUAWEI  Free Buds 2正在播放声音…”。不限于此，该提示信息1155还可以是图片，声音等其他类型的提示。该停止播放控件1154用于触发终端100发送停止播放请求给配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)，用于请求配件设备(例如蓝牙耳机)停止播放声音。
在一些实施例中，配件设备可以为蓝牙耳机，一些类型(例如，真无线立体声(true wireless stereo，TWS)类型)的蓝牙耳机可以包括左耳耳机和右耳耳机，且左耳耳机和右耳耳机在机械结构上独立分开。终端100可以通过BLE广播控制蓝牙耳机只通过左耳耳机播放声音或者只通过右耳播放声音。例如，终端100可以接收用户作用于左耳静音控件1151的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以发送左耳静音请求给蓝牙耳机。蓝牙耳机在接收到该左耳静音请求后，可以禁止左耳耳机播放声音。终端100可以接收用户作用于右耳静音控件1153的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以发送右耳静音请求给蓝牙耳机。蓝牙耳机在接收到该右耳静音请求后，可以禁止右耳耳机播放声音。这样，可以便于用户找到单个的左耳耳机或右耳耳机。
在一些应用场景中，终端100附近可以有多个显示设备。终端100可以通过在主屏幕界面接收到用户的滑动操作(例如，三指滑动)，将终端100的触控屏上的显示内容投屏至与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的显示设备。这样，可以简化用户投屏的操作步骤，提高了用户体验。
首先，示例性的介绍本应用场景下的系统架构。
请参照图12，为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构图。如图12所示，该系统12包括有终端100和附近设备。附近设备包括显示设备104和显示设备105，等等。其中，该图12中示例性的示出了本申请的一些应用场景中，终端100与显示设备104和显示设备105在水平面上的位置关系。
在本申请的实施例中，为了便于说明终端100与附近设备的位置关系，可以将设备的上的以参考点(例如，可以是中心位置点)表示其在平面图中的位置。例如，可以用终端100的中心位置点，代表其在水平面中的位置。本申请实施例中，可以将终端100的中心位置点为起始点垂直于终端100触控屏的上边缘的向量所指方向，作为终端100的基准方向，也可以称为终端100的0度方向。
因此，如图12所示，显示设备104可以在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，显示设备105可以在终端100的顺时针90度方向0.5m处。
在本申请实施例中，终端100的附近设备可以不限于上述图12中的两个显示设备，还可以有更多或更少，图12中只是示例性的以两个显示设备解释本申请，不应构成限定。上述图12中示例性的示出了上述两个显示设备(显示设备104、显示设备105)与终端100的相对位置关系，仅仅示例性的解释本申请实施例，不应构成限定。
下面介绍本申请中基于上述图12所示系统场景的UI实施例。
在图13A-图13C示例性示出的UI实施例中，用户可以在主屏幕界面通过滑动操作触发打开终端100上图库应用中的图片后，通过滑动操作，将终端100的触控屏上的显示内容投屏至与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的显示设备。
如图13A所示，终端100可以显示出有主屏幕的界面510，针对该界面510的文字说明可以参考上述图5A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。终端100可以接收用户作用于主屏幕的界面510上的滑动操作，例如，该滑动操作可以是三根手指触摸触控屏滑动。其中，该滑动操作的起始位置可以在该主屏幕的界面510的任意位置，不作限定。该滑动操作的滑动方向可以由滑动操作的起始位置和终点位置确定，其轨迹可以是曲线，可以是直线，本申请不作限制。响应于该滑动操作，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE到达角(angle of arrival，AoA)测量附近的一个或多个显示设备相对于终端100的方向位置。终端100可以根据附近的一个或多个显示设备的方向位置，再从该一个或显示设备(例如显示设备104、终显示设备105)中确定出与滑动方向(例如滑动方向为终端100的顺时针90度方向，即终端100正右方向)一致且较近的投屏设备(例如，投屏设备为显示设备104)。
终端100在确定出接收设备后，可以显示如图13B所示的提示框1310，用于请求用户确认是否投屏终端100上触控屏当前的显示内容至接收设备(例如显示设备105)。
如图13B所示，该提示框1310中包括有确认按钮1311和取消按钮1312。其中，该确认按钮1311用于触发终端100投屏当前的显示内容至投屏设备上。该取消按钮549B用于触发终端100取消投屏当前的显示内容至投屏设备上。其中，该提示框1310中可以显示有投屏设备的设备名称，用于让用户确认该投屏设备是否符合预期。由于，终端100确定出的投屏设备为显示设备105，终端100可以在提示框1310中显示该显示设备105的设备名称(例如，显示设备105的设备名称可以为“HUAWEI TV”)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于提示框1310中确认按钮1311的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以通过Wi-Fi P2P等通信技术以及一些投屏协议(例如mircast协议或dlna协议或airplay协议，等等)，将终端100的触控屏上当前的显示内容投屏至投屏设备上。
如图13C所示，终端100确定出的投屏设备可以显示设备105。显示设备105上可以显示有界面1320。其中，该界面1320与终端100上当前显示的主屏幕的界面510在界面元素上相同。其中，由于显示设备105的显示屏与终端100的触控屏在尺寸上可能会有不同。因此，显示设备105显示该界面1320的尺寸与终端100显示该界面510的尺寸也可能会有不同。
在一些应用场景中，终端100附近可以有多个音频设备(例如，蓝牙音箱、蓝牙耳机，等等)。用户可以通过在音乐播放界面，通过滑动操作(例如，三指滑动)，将终端100与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的音频设备建立蓝牙连接。建立蓝牙连接之后，终端100可以将音频数据发送至该音频设备上播放。这样，可以简化用户选择音频设备播放音频数据的操作步骤，提高了用户体验。
首先，示例性的介绍本应用场景下的系统架构。
请参照图14，为本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构图。如图14所示，该系统14包括有终端100和附近设备。附近设备包括音频设备106和音频设备107，等等。其中，该图14中示例性的示出了本申请的一些应用场景中，终端100与音频设备106和音频设备107在水平面上的位置关系。
在本申请的实施例中，为了便于说明终端100与附近设备的位置关系，可以将设备的上的以参考点(例如，可以是中心位置点)表示其在平面图中的位置。例如，可以用终端100的中心位置点，代表其在水平面中的位置。本申请实施例中，可以将终端100的中心位置点为起始点垂直于终端100触控屏的上边缘的向量所指方向，作为终端100的基准方向，也可以称为终端100的0度方向。
因此，如图14所示，音频设备106可以在终端100的顺时针45度方向0.8m处，音频设备107可以在终端100的顺时针90度方向0.5m处。
在本申请实施例中，终端100的附近设备可以不限于上述图14中的两个音频设备，还可以有更多或更少，图14中只是示例性的以两个音频设备解释本申请，不应构成限定。上述图14中示例性的示出了上述两个音频设备(音频设备106、音频设备107)与终端100的相对位置关系，仅仅示例性的解释本申请实施例，不应构成限定。
下面介绍本申请中基于上述图14所示系统场景的UI实施例。
在图15A-图15C示例性示出的UI实施例中，在音乐播放界面，通过滑动操作(例如，三指滑动)，将终端100与该滑动操作的滑动方向一致且在该方向上最近的音频设备建立蓝牙连接。建立蓝牙连接之后，终端100可以将音频数据发送至该音频设备上播放。
如图15A所示，终端100可以显示出有主屏幕的界面510，针对该界面510的文字说明可以参考上述图5A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。终端100可以接收用户作用于音乐应用图标512C的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以显示如图15B所示的音乐播放界面1510。
如图15B所示，该音乐播放界面1510包括有音乐名称1511、播放/暂停控件1512、上一首控件1513、下一首控件1514、播放进度条1515、下载控件1516、分享控件1517、更多按钮1518，等等。例如，该音乐名称1511可以是“Dream it possible”。该播放/暂停控件1512用于触发终端100播放或暂停播放该音乐名称1511对应的音频数据。该上一首控件1513可用于触发终端100切换至播放列表中的上一个音频数据进行播放。该下一首控件1514可用于触发终端100切换至播放列表中的下一个音频数据进行播放。该播放进度条1515可用于指示当前音频数据的播放进度。该下载控件1516可用于触发终端100下载并保存该音乐名称1511的音频数据至本地存储介质中。该分享控件1517可用于触发终端100分享该音乐名称1511对应音频数据的播放链接至其他应用。该更多控件1518可用于触发终端100显示更多关于音乐播放的功能控件。
如图15C所示，终端100可以接收用户作用于该音乐播放界面1510上的滑动操作。例如，该滑动操作可以是三根手指触摸触控屏滑动。其中，该滑动操作的起始位置可以在该音乐播放界面1510的任意位置，不作限定。该滑动操作的滑动方向可以由滑动操作的起始位置和终点位置确定，其轨迹可以是曲线，可以是直线，本申请不作限制。响应于该滑动操作，终端100可以开启蓝牙功能，通过BLE到达角(angle of arrival，AoA)测量附近的一个或多个音频设备相对于终端100的方向位置。终端100可以根据附近的一个或多个音频设备的方向位置，再从该一个或音频设备(例如音频设备106、终音频设备107)中确定出与滑动方向(例如滑动方向为终端100的顺时针90度方向，即终端100正右方向)一致 且较近的播放设备(例如，播放设备为音频设备107)。
终端100在确定出接收设备后，可以显示如图15D所示的提示框1520，用于请求用户确认是否将上述音乐名称1511对应的音频数据发送至播放设备(例如音频设备107)上播放。
如图15D所示，该提示框1520中包括有确认按钮1521和取消按钮1522。其中，该确认按钮1521用于触发终端100将上述音乐名称1511对应的音频数据发送至播放设备(例如音频设备107)上播放。该取消按钮549B用于触发终端100取消将上述音乐名称1511对应的音频数据发送至播放设备(例如音频设备107)上播放。其中，该提示框1520中可以显示有播放设备的设备名称，用于让用户确认该播放设备是否符合预期。由于，终端100确定出的播放设备为音频设备107，终端100可以在提示框1520中显示该音频设备107的设备名称(例如，音频设备107的设备名称可以为“HUAWEI AM 08”)。
终端100可以接收用户作用于提示框1520中确认按钮1521的操作(例如单击)，响应于该操作，终端100可以与播放设备(例如音频设备107)建立蓝牙连接，并将上述音乐名称1511对应的音频数据发送至该播放设备(例如音频设备107)上进行播放。
如图15E所示，终端100确定出的播放设备可以音频设备107。终端100可以在与音频设备107建立蓝牙连接后，可以将上述音乐名称1511对应的音频数据发送至该音频设备107上进行播放。
下面介绍本申请中蓝牙AoA定位协议框架。
如图16所示，本申请实施例提供了一种蓝牙AoA定位协议框架，包括但不限于应用(APP)层、协议框架(Framework)层、蓝牙协议栈(Stack)和蓝牙控制器(BT Controller)。
其中，应用层可以包括有华为分享(Huawei Share)应用。协议框架(Framework)层包括有AoA接口。蓝牙协议栈(Stack)中包括有AoA控制模块和AoA定位算法。蓝牙控制器中包括有到达角控制器(AoA Controller)。
对于AoA定位发射端(例如终端100)，当AoA定位发射端到用户触发分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)时，可以先打开该华为分享应用。在开启华为分享应用后，华为分享应用可以通过协议框架层中的AoA接口下发AoA测量指令给蓝牙协议栈(Stack)中的AoA控制模块。AoA控制模块在接收到AoA测量指令后可以控制AoA Controller向附近设备发送AoA固定频率扩展信号(constant tone extension，CTE)广播包。
对于AoA定位接收端(例如终端103或显示设备105或音频设备107)，AoA Controller在接收到AoA定位发射端发送的AoA CTE广播包后，可以通过AoA Controller测量到同相正交(in-phase and quadrature，IQ)相位信息。在测量到IQ相位信息后，AoA Controller可以将IQ相位信息发送给AoA控制模块。AoA控制模块可以通过AoA定位算法从IQ相位信息中计算出该AoA定位响应者的AoA值。在计算出AoA值后，AoA控制模块可以将测量出的AoA值通过AoA接口发送给华为分享应用。
在本申请实施例中，可以通过底层AoA控制和定位算法能力封装成一套标准SDK供数据分享服务(例如华为分享应用)调用来实现本申请实施例中提供的数据分享功能。
下面介绍本申请中的蓝牙天线系统架构。
本申请中，利用AoA技术对中终端设备进行定位，需要各终端设备必须具备三天线架构，支持BT 5.1 AoA标准，用于角度测量和距离测量。
如图17所示，本申请实施例提供了一种蓝牙天线系统架构，可以包括但不限于蓝牙(BT)芯片1701、单刀三掷开关(single pole three throw，SP3T)1702、三个射频前端模块(front end module，FEM)(包括射频前端模块1703A、射频前端模块1703B和射频前端模块1703C)、三个分频器(Extractor)(包括分频器1704A、分频器1704B和分频器1704C)、三个天线(天线0、天线1和天线2)。其中，一个射频前端模块和一个分频器可以组成一个射频通道。例如，射频前端模块1703A与分频器1704A可以组成射频通道0与天线0连接，射频前端模块1703B与分频器1704B可以组成射频通道1与天线1连接,射频前端模块1703C与分频器1704C可以组成射频通道2与天线2连接。
其中，该射频前端模块可用于控制天线的接收和发射控制逻辑。该单刀三掷开关1702可用于切换AoA三天线进行接收。分频器可用于只让在2.4G频段的蓝牙信号接收进来。
下面介绍本申请中蓝牙芯片系统架构。
如图18所示，本申请实施例提供了一种蓝牙芯片系统架构，可以包括但不限于应用处理器(AP)1810和蓝牙(BT)芯片1820。其中，该应用处理器1810中可以包括有蓝牙AoA服务(BT AoA Service)1811和蓝牙AoA协议栈(BT AoA Stack)1812。该蓝牙芯片1820中可以包括有蓝牙AoA管理模块(BT AoA Management)1821、蓝牙AoA测量模块(BT AoAMersure)1822。其中，该蓝牙AoA服务1811可以是上述实施例中的华为分享应用、查找我的设备应用，等需要AoA定位的功能/服务/应用。
在本申请示例中，该蓝牙芯片系统1800可以在AoA定位发射端(例如终端100)中或者AoA定位接收端(例如上述实施例中的终端101、终端102、终端103、显示设备104、显示设备105、音频设备106、音频设备107，等)中。
其中，对于AoA定位发射端，该蓝牙芯片系统1800中可以实现如下步骤：
1、蓝牙AoA服务1811发送启动指令给蓝牙AoA协议栈1812，指示蓝牙AoA协议栈1812进行AoA定位与测距。
2、蓝牙AoA协议栈1812可以发送AoA广播指令给蓝牙AoA管理模块1821，指示蓝牙AoA管理模块1821进行AoA定位广播。
3、蓝牙AoA管理模块1821可以触发蓝牙AoA测量模块发送AoA CTE报文。
对于AoA定位接收端，该蓝牙芯片系统1800中可以实现如下步骤：
4、蓝牙AoA测量模块1822可以在接收到AoA定位发射端发送的AoA CTE报文后，将AoA CTE报文发送给蓝牙AoA管理模块1821。
5、蓝牙AoA管理模块1821在接收到AoA CTE报文后，可以根据AoA CTE报文解析出AoA IQ相位信息和信号接收强度值(RSSI)。然后，蓝牙AoA管理模块1821可以将AoA IQ相位信息和RSSI上报给蓝牙AoA协议栈1812。
6、蓝牙AoA协议栈1812在接收到AoA IQ相位信息和RSSI后可以通过AoA测量算法计算出AoA值和距离预估值。
7、蓝牙AoA协议栈1812在计算出AoA值和距离预估值后，可以将该AoA值和距离预估值上报给蓝牙AoA服务1811。
8、蓝牙AoA服务1811可以用该AoA值和距离预估值进行定位结果的仲裁与判定。
在一些实施例中，AoA定位接收端还可以将测量到的该AoA值和距离预估值发送给AoA定位发射端，由AoA定位发射端中的AoA服务1811进行定位结果的仲裁与判定。例如，终端100的附近设备在测量到AoA值以及距离预估值(或RSSI值)可以将AoA值以及距离预估值(或RSSI值)发送给终端100。终端100可以根据该AoA值以及距离预估值(或RSSI值)判断附近设备的位置方向是否与用户在触控屏上滑动的方向一致且距离最近。
在本申请实施例中，AoA定位接收可以根据测量到的IQ相位信息，从AoA指纹库中查找到与该IQ相位信息对应的AoA值。其中，该AoA指纹库中包括有IQ相位信息和AoA值的对应关系。其中，一组IQ相位信息对应有一个AoA值。
下面介绍本申请中蓝牙AoA定位标准协议交互过程。
在本申请中两设备之间通过蓝牙AoA定位可以是在BLE无连接场景下，即两设备在没有建立BLE连接的情况下，实现AoA定位。其中，蓝牙AoA定位的涉及交互的两设备可以称为AoA定位发射端和AoA定位接收端。该AoA定位发射端可以为本申请上述实施例中的终端100。该AoA定位接收端可以为上述实施例中的终端101、终端102、终端103、显示设备104、显示设备105、音频设备106或音频设备107，等等。
如图19A所示，Host A是指AoA定位接收端上蓝牙协议中的主机协议栈(Host)。LL A是指AoA定位接收端上蓝牙协议中的链路层(link layer，LL)。Host B是指AoA定位发射端上蓝牙协议中的主机协议栈(Host)。LL B是指AoA定位发射端上蓝牙协议中的链路层(link layer，LL)。
其中，AoA定位发射端，经过一系列参数设置后，使能BLE AoA报文周期性广播。其中，具体设置包括：扩展广播参数设置(LE Set Extended Advertising Parameters)、周期广播参数设置(LE Set Periodic Advertising Parameters)和无连接补充参数设置(LE Set Connectionless Supplemental Parameters)。然后，AoA定位发射端逐步使能无连接补充参数设置(LE Set Connectionless Supplemental Parameters Enable)、使能周期广播参数设置(LE Set Periodic Advertising Parameters Enable)、使能扩展广播参数设置(LE Set Extended Advertising Parameters Enable)。最后，AoA定位发射端填充周期广播的IQ数据，不断广播(ADV_EXT_IND)给周围设备。
其中，扩展广播参数设置可以包括设置扩展广播的句柄(Advertising Handle)、广播事件属性(Advertising Event Properties)、广播信道的广播间隔大小范围(Primary Advertising Interval Min，Primary Advertising Interval Max)、广播信道(Primary Advertising Channel Map)、本端地址类型(Own Address Type)、本端地址(Own Address)、同行地址类型(Peer Address Type)、同行地址(Peer Address)、广播滤波方式(Advertising Filter Policy)、发射功率(Advertising Tx Power)、主要广播PHY类型(Primary Advertising PHY)，等等。
该扩展广播参数设置可包括设置周期广播的句柄(Advertising Handle)，周期广播间隔的大小范围(Periodic Advertising Interval Min，Periodic Advertising Interval Max)，周期广播属性(Periodic Advertising Properties)，发射功率(Tx Power)，等等。
该无连接补充参数设置包括设置广播的句柄(Advertising Handle)，CTE包的长度(CTE Length)，CTE包的类型(CTE Type)，CTE包的数量(CTE Count)，切换模式的长度(Length of Switching Pattern)，天线序列(Antenna IDs[i])等等。
如图19B所示，Host A是指AoA定位接收端上蓝牙协议中的主机(Host)。LL A是指AoA定位接收端上蓝牙协议中的链路层(link layer，LL)。Host B是指AoA定位发射端上蓝牙协议中的主机(Host)。LL B是指AoA定位发射端上蓝牙协议中的链路层(link layer，LL)。
AoA定位接收端设置好扩展扫描参数(LE Set Extended Scan Parameters)并使能设置扩展扫描(LE Set Extended Scan Enable)后，可以接收到AoA定位发射端的AoA Tx广播，在进行周期广播的同步关联，在关联成功后，AoA定位发射端可以按照双方约定的周期进行周期广播给AoA定位接收端。AoA定位接收端可以进行IQ相位信息的收集和整合，并输入给AoA定位算法模块进行计算，得出AoA定位发射端相对于AoA定位接收端的角度方向。
其中，在上述图19A和图19B所示的蓝牙AoA定位标准协议可以参照BT 5.1 AoA标准协议。
下面介绍本申请中，终端100如何判定附近设备的方向位置与滑动方向一致。
如图20所示，终端100的指南针角度θ1可以为终端100的0度方向与指南针正北(N)方向的夹角。终端100上滑动操作的滑动角度θ2可以为滑动操作的滑动方向向量与终端100的0度方向的夹角。附近设备的AoA角度θ3为从附近设备指定位置(例如中心位置)到终端100的指定位置(例如中心位置)的方向向量与附近设备的0度方向之间的夹角。附近设备的指南针角度θ4可以为终端100的0度方向与指南针正北(N)方向的夹角。
本申请实施例中，可以将终端100的中心位置点为起始点垂直于终端100触控屏的上边缘的向量所指方向，作为终端100的0度方向，也可以称为终端100的基准方向。
因此，假定滑动操作的滑动方向指向该附件设备时，则可以认为：滑动操作的滑动角度θ2和终端100的指南针角度θ1之差，与附近设备AoA角度θ3和附近设备的指南针角度θ4之差，这两个差值之和应该等于180度。具体实现中，可以有一定的误差，因此当误差在指定差值范围内，例如，-15度～+15度之内，就可以认为该滑动方向指向该附近设备。
即满足如下公式(1)，即可以认为该附近设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向一致。其中该公式(1)可以如下所示：
||θ2-θ1|+|θ3-θ4|-180|≤△度公式(1)
其中，示例性的，△值可以为15度。
下面介绍本申请中通过蓝牙信号强度值RSSI测量距离流程。
本申请中可以通过如下两种方式，实现蓝牙信号强度值RSSI的预估测距。
方式1：附近设备在接收到终端100发送的BLE广播信号后，可以通过单天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离。其中，在单天线RSSI的距离测量方案中，距离r与RSSI之间的对应关系可以如下公式(2)：
r＝10^((|RSSI|-A)/10n)        公式(2)
其中，A为预设的发射端(即终端100)和接收端(即附近设备)距离1m时的信号强度，n为预设的环境衰减因子。
方式2：附近设备在接收到终端100发送的BLE广播信号后，可以通过多天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离。
如图21所示，该多天线测距的方法流程可以包括：
S2101、附近设备进行BLE扫描。
S2102、附近设备在扫描到终端100通过BLE广播包后，可以在三个天线上接收到不同的RSSI值。
S2103、附件设备可以根据三天线上的RSSI平均值，计算出与终端100的距离。
其中，附近设备在获取到三天线上的RSSI平均值后，可以根据上述公式(2)计算出与终端100的距离。
S2104、附近设备可以判断该距离是否小于指定距离阈值(例如1m)。若是，执行步骤S2105、附近设备可以返回确认响应给终端100，若否，则可以执行步骤S2106、附近设备可以不返回确认响应给终端100。
其中，当终端100接收到该附近设备的响应之后，才开始进行AoA定位，发送AoA广播包给附近设备。
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种数据分享的方法流程。
请参见图22，图22示出了一种数据分享的方法流程图。其中，该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有终端100和附近设备。其中，附近设备示例性的以终端101、终端102和终端103，附近设备可以不限于示例出的终端101、终端102和终端103，还可以有更多设备。其中，该终端100与终端101、终端102、终端103的位置可以示例性的参考上述图4所示系统架构。
如图22所示，该方法包括：
S2201、终端100显示文件展示界面。该文件展示界面中显示包括有文件对象。
示例性的，该文件对象可以是图片、视频、文档等文件对象。文件展示界面可以包括图片展示界面、视频展示界面、文档展示界面等等。其中，示例性的，图片展示界面可以参考上述图5D所示的图片展示界面540或上述8D中所示的图片展示界面830。视频的展示界面可以参考上述图6C中的视频文件展示界面630。具体内容，可以参考前述实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2202、终端100接收用户在该展示界面上的滑动操作。
其中，该滑动操作可以是三指滑动、双指滑动、单指滑动、指关节滑动等等，在此不作限定。具体内容可以参考前述UI实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2203、终端100可以检测滑动操作的滑动角度。
其中，该滑动操作的起始位置可以在文件展示界面上的任意位置，不作限定。该滑动操作的滑动方向可以由滑动操作的起始位置和终点位置确定，其轨迹可以曲线，可以是直线，本申请不作限制。其中，该滑动操作的滑动角度可以是滑动操作的滑动方向与终端100指定方向(例如图4中所示终端100的0度方向)上的夹角。
S2204、终端100通过BLE广播发送定位请求给附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)。
终端100可以响应于该滑动操作，通过BLE广播发送定位请求给附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)。
S2205、附近设备在扫描到终端100的BLE广播后，可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值，确定出与终端100的距离。
附近设备在接收到终端100发送的定位请求后，可以检测接收到该BLE广播的信号强度值，并根据该BLE广播的信号强度值，确定出与终端100的距离。
其中，附近设备根据该BLE广播的信号强度值，确定出与终端100的距离的流程可以有如下两种方式：通过单天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离，和通过多天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离。其中，通过单天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离可以参考上述公式(2)，通过多天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离可以参考图21所示实施例，在此不作赘述。
S2206、附近设备可以判断与终端100的距离是否小于指定距离阈值。若是，则执行步骤S2207、附近设备可以发送确认响应给终端100。若否，则附近设备不发送确认响应给终端100。
示例性的，指定距离阈值可以是1m。附近设备中有终端101、终端102、终端103。终端101可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值RSSI1，确定出与终端100的距离为0.8m。终端102可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值RSSI2，确定出与终端100的距离为1.2m处。终端103可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值RSSI3，确定出与终端100的距离为0.5m。
由于终端101、终端103与终端100的距离小于指定阈值(例如1m)，因此，终端101和终端103可以通过BLE广播返回确认响应给终端100。由于终端102与终端100的距离大于指定距离阈值(例如1m)，因此，终端102不返回确认响应给终端100，不再参与之后的方法流程。
在一些的实施例中，附近设备也可以直接判断接收到BLE广播的定位请求的信号强度值是否大于指定强度阈值，若是，则执行步骤S2207、附件设备可以方送确认响应给终端100。若否，则附近设备不发送确认响应给终端100。
在本申请实施例中，终端100可以被称为第一终端。接收到BLE广播的定位请求的信号强度值大于指定强度阈值的附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)可以被称为第二终端。若附近设备将接收到BLE广播的定位请求的信号强度值换算成与终端100的距离，则与终端100的距离小于指定距离阈值的附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)可以被称为第二 终端。
S2208、终端100在接收到确认响应后，可以发送AoA广播包给附近设备。
其中，该AoA广播包可以是包括有固定频率扩展(constant tone extension，CTE)信号的BLE广播包。终端100发送AoA广播包的协议流程可以参考前述图19A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2209、附近设备可以根据接收到的AoA广播包，测量出AoA角度。
其中，附近设备根据接收到的AoA广播包的协议流程可以参考上述图19B所示实施例。附近设根据接收到的AoA广播包，测量出AoA角度，可以参考上述图18所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2210、附近设备可以通过BLE广播发送与终端100之间的距离信息、指南针角度以及AoA角度给终端100。
例如，由于终端101、终端103的与终端100的距离小于指定距离，因此，终端101可以将终端101与终端100的距离信息(r1)、终端101的指南针角度(β1)和终端101的AoA角度(α1)给终端100。终端103可以将终端103与终端100的距离信息(r3)、终端103的指南针角度(β3)和终端103的AoA角度(α3)给终端100。
其中，附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)与终端100的距离信息可以是附近设备接收到AoA广播包的信号强度值RSSI(三个天线上的平均RSSI值)。终端100在接收到该AoA广播包的信号强度值RSSI(三个天线上的平均RSSI值)后，可以根据公式(2)计算出终端100与附近设备之间的距离。附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)与终端100的距离信息还可以直接是附近设备根据AoA广播包的信号强度值RSSI(三个天线上的平均RSSI值)按照上述(2)计算出的距离。根据接收信号强度RSSI计算出距离的过程，可以参考前述实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2211、终端100可以根据与附近设备的距离信息、滑动方向角、本端的指南针角度、附近设备的指南针角度以及附近设备的AoA角度，确定出位于滑动方向上最近的接收设备。
其中，若上述第二终端(例如终端101、终端103)中存在唯一一个相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向一致的第三终端，则终端100(第一终端)可以将该唯一的第三终端确定为上述接收设备。若上述第二终端(例如终端101、终端103)中存在多个相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向一致的第三终端，则终端100(第一终端)可以将将距离终端100最近的第三终端确定为上述接收设备。
在本申请实施例中，接收设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向可以有一定的误差，也即是说，当接收设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向的夹角小于指定角度阈值(例如15度)时，即可以认为接收设备相对于终端100的方向与滑动方向一致。具体内容可以参考前述图20所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，第一终端(终端100)可以根据该附近设备中一个或多个第二终端(例如终端101和终端103)的位置信息以及第一终端(终端100)的指南针角度，确定该一个或多个第二终端(例如终端101和终端103)相对于所述第一终端的方向位置，并显示该一个或多个第二终端相对于该第一终端(终端100)的方向和距离。
S2212、终端100可以通过BLE广播发送数据分享请求给接收设备。
S2213、接收设备在接收到数据分享请求后可以显示数据分享提示，用于提示用户确认接收数据。
其中，示例性的，接收设备可以为终端103。该数据分享提示可以是上述图5G中终端103上显示的提示框560。该提示框560中包括有接收按钮561和拒绝按钮562。具体内容可以参考上述图5G所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2214、接收设备接收用户的确认接收操作。
其中，示例性的，接收设备可以为终端103。该确认接收操作可以是上述图5G中，终端103接收用户作用于接收按钮561的操作(例如单击)。具体内容可以参考上述图5G所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2215、响应于该确认接收操作，接收设备可以与终端100建立文件传输连接。
其中，文件传输连接可以为Wi-Fi直连(Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP或超宽带(ultra-wideband，UWB)等通信连接。
S2216、在接收设备与终端100建立文件传输连接后，终端100可以将上述用户选中的文件数据传输给该接收设备(例如终端103)。
本申请提供一种数据分享的方法，终端100可以通过在文件展示界面(例如，显示有图片、视频和文档等文件对象的界面)中接收用户的滑动操作，并检测该滑动操作的滑动方向。终端可以响应于该滑动操作，通过低功耗蓝牙(Bluetooth Low Energy，BLE)AoA测量技术，测量附近设备相对于终端的方向位置。然后，终端100可以确定出方向位置与上述滑动操作的滑动方向一致且较近的附近设备，并将该文件展示界面中的文件对象发送给方向位置与滑动方向一致且最近的附近设备。这样，可以简化用户分享文件数据(例如图片、视频、文档等)的操作步骤，给用户提供了方便。
下面介绍本申请另一实施例提供的一种数据分享的方法流程。
请参见图23，图23示出了本申请另一实施例中一种数据分享的方法流程图。其中，该方法流程图中涉及的设备包括有终端100和附近设备。其中，附近设备示例性的以终端101、终端102和终端103，附近设备可以不限于示例出的终端101、终端102和终端103，还可以有更多设备。其中，该终端100与终端101、终端102、终端103的位置可以示例性的参考上述图4所示系统架构。
如图23所示，该方法包括：
S2301、终端100显示文件选择界面。该文件选择界面显示包括有用户选择的文件选项。
其中，该文件选择界面可以参考上述图9G所示的文件选择界面940。上述图9G中所示的文件选择界面940中，用户选择的文件选项为“旅行”视频选项955和“夕阳”视频选项956。具体内容，可以参考前述实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2302、终端100接收用户的第一操作。
示例性的，该终端100可以上述图9G所示实施例中针对发送控件949的操作(例如单击)。具体内容，可以参考前述实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2303、响应于该第一操作，终端100通过BLE广播发送定位请求给附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)。
终端100可以响应于该第一操作，通过BLE广播发送定位请求给附近设备(例如终端101、终端102和终端103)。
S2304、附近设备在扫描到终端100的BLE广播后，可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值，确定出与终端100的距离。
附近设备在接收到终端100发送的定位请求后，可以检测接收到该BLE广播的信号强度值，并根据该BLE广播的信号强度值，确定出与终端100的距离。
其中，附近设备根据该BLE广播的信号强度值，确定出与终端100的距离的流程可以有如下两种方式：通过单天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离，和通过多天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离。其中，通过单天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离可以参考上述公式(2)，通过多天线的RSSI信号测量与终端100的距离可以参考图21所示实施例，在此不作赘述。
S2305、附近设备可以判断与终端100的距离是否小于指定距离阈值。若是，则执行步骤S2306、附近设备可以发送确认响应给终端100。若否，则附近设备不发送确认响应给终端100。
示例性的，指定距离阈值可以是1m。附近设备中有终端101、终端102、终端103。终端101可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值RSSI1，确定出与终端100的距离为0.8m。终端102可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值RSSI2，确定出与终端100的距离为1.2m处。终端103可以根据接收BLE广播的信号强度值RSSI3，确定出与终端100的距离为0.5m。
由于终端101、终端103与终端100的距离小于指定阈值(例如1m)，因此，终端101和终端103可以通过BLE广播返回确认响应给终端100。由于终端102与终端100的距离大于指定距离阈值(例如1m)，因此，终端102不返回确认响应给终端100，不再参与之后的方法流程。
在一些的实施例中，附近设备也可以直接判断接收到BLE广播的定位请求的信号强度值是否大于指定强度阈值，若是，则执行步骤S2207、附件设备可以方送确认响应给终端100。若否，则附近设备不发送确认响应给终端100。
在本申请实施例中，终端100可以被称为第一终端。接收到BLE广播的定位请求的信号强度值大于指定强度阈值的附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)可以被称为第二终端。若附近设备将接收到BLE广播的定位请求的信号强度值换算成与终端100的距离，则与终端100的距离小于指定距离阈值的附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)可以被称为第二终端。
S2307、终端100在接收到确认响应后，可以发送AoA广播包给附近设备。
其中，该AoA广播包可以是包括有固定频率扩展(constant tone extension，CTE)信号的BLE广播包。终端100发送AoA广播包的协议流程可以参考前述图19A所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2308、附近设备可以根据接收到的AoA广播包，测量出AoA角度。
其中，附近设备根据接收到的AoA广播包的协议流程可以参考上述图19B所示实施例。 附近设根据接收到的AoA广播包，测量出AoA角度，可以参考上述图18所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2309、附近设备可以通过BLE广播发送与终端100之间的距离信息以及AoA角度给终端100。
例如，由于终端101、终端103的与终端100的距离小于指定距离，因此，终端101可以将终端101与终端100的距离信息(r1)和终端101的AoA角度(α1)给终端100。终端103可以将终端103与终端100的距离信息(r3)和终端103的AoA角度(α3)给终端100。
其中，附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)与终端100的距离信息可以是附近设备接收到AoA广播包的信号强度值RSSI(三个天线上的平均RSSI值)。终端100在接收到该AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI(三个天线上的平均RSSI值)后，可以根据公式(2)计算出终端100与附近设备之间的距离。附近设备(例如终端101和终端103)与终端100的距离信息还可以直接是附近设备根据接收到AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI(三个天线上的平均RSSI值)按照上述(2)计算出的距离。根据接收信号强度RSSI计算出距离的过程，可以参考前述实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2310、终端100可以根据与附近设备的距离信息以及附近设备的AoA角度，确定出附近设备相对于终端100的方向和距离。
其中，针对附近设备的AoA角度的文字说明可以参考上述图20所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2311、终端100显示附件设备相对于终端100的方向位置。
示例性，终端100可以显示如上述图9H所示的雷达图970。其中，在终端100搜索到附近设备且测量出附近设备的方向位置后，终端100可以在雷达图970中显示出附近设备相对于终端100的方向位置。其中，附近设备可以有终端101、终端102和终端103。该终端101的设备名称可以为“Verseau”，该终端102的设备名称可以为“Daniel”，该终端103的设备名称可以为“HUAWEI P30 Pro”。
其中，终端100测量出的附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)的方向位置可以参考上述图4示例性示出的终端100与附近设备(终端101、终端102和终端103)的位置关系。终端101可以在终端100的顺时针315度方向0.8m处，终端102可以在终端100的顺时针45度方向1.2m处，终端103可以在终端100的顺时针90度方向0.5m处。
终端100可以在雷达图970上显示出自身的位置标记971，终端101的位置标记972、终端102的位置标记973和终端103的位置标记974。其中，终端100的位置标记971与附近设备的位置标记之间的位置关系可以参考终端100与附近设备的位置关系。
其中，各位置标记(位置标记971、位置标记972、位置标记973、位置标记974)之间的距离可以根据终端100与附近设备的距离，按照一定比例进行缩放。附近设备的位置标记(位置标记972、位置标记973和位置标记974)相对于位置标记971的方向，与附近设备相对于终端100的方向相同。
具体内容，可以参考上述图9H所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2312、终端100接收用户选择出接收设备的第二操作。
示例性的，该第二操作可以是上述图9H中针对位置标记974的操作(例如单击)，由于该位置标记974对应终端103。因此，终端100可以根据该针对该位置标记974的操作，确定出接收设备为终端103。
具体内容，可以参考上述图9H所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2313、终端100通过BLE广播发送数据分享请求给接收设备。
S2314、接收设备在接收到数据分享请求后可以显示数据分享提示，用于提示用户确认接收数据。
其中，示例性的，接收设备可以为终端103。该数据分享提示可以是上述图9I中终端103上显示的提示框990。该提示框990中包括有接收按钮991和拒绝按钮992。具体内容可以参考上述图9I所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2315、接收设备接收用户的确认接收操作。
其中，示例性的，接收设备可以为终端103。该确认接收操作可以是上述图9I中终端103接收用户作用于接收按钮991的操作(例如单击)。具体内容可以参考上述图9I所示实施例，在此不再赘述。
S2316、响应于该确认接收操作，接收设备可以与终端100建立文件传输连接。
其中，文件传输连接可以为Wi-Fi直连(Wi-Fi P2P)、Wi-Fi softAP或超宽带(ultra-wideband，UWB)等通信连接。
S2317、在接收设备与终端100建立文件传输连接后，终端100可以将上述用户选中的文件数据传输给该接收设备(例如终端103)。
示例性的，终端100可以将上述图9G中所示的“旅行”视频选项955对应的视频文件和“夕阳”视频选项956对应的视频文件发送给接收设备(例如终端103)。具体内容，可以参考前述实施例，在此不再赘述。
通过本申请实施例提供一种数据分享的方法，终端100可以在用户选择要分享的图片、视频、文档等文件对象后，接收用的操作，触发测量并显示附近设备的方向位置(包括方向与距离)。然后，终端100接收用户的操作，从附近设备中选择出文件的接收设备，以触发终端100将用户选中的文件对象发送给接收设备。这样，用户可以在通过终端100分享文件数据给附近设备时，知晓附近设备的位置，便于用户确定文件数据的接收设备。
以上所述，以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案，而非对其限制；尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明，本领域的普通技术人员应当理解：其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改，或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换；而这些修改或者替换，并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。

Claims (34)

  1. 一种数据分享的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一终端显示文件展示界面，所述文件展示界面中显示有文件对象；
    所述第一终端接收用户针对所述文件对象的滑动操作；
    响应于所述滑动操作，所述第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息；
    所述第一终端根据所述滑动操作的滑动方向、所述第一终端的指南针角度以及所述一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从所述一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备；其中，在所述一个或多个第二终端中，所述接收设备相对于所述第一终端的方向与所述滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值；所述接收设备相对于所述第一终端的方向由所述第一终端的指南针角度以及所述接收设备的位置信息确定；
    所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端通过BLE广播定位请求；其中，所述第二终端接收到所述定位请求时的BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备之前，所述方法包括：
    所述第一终端发送数据分享请求给所述接收设备；
    所述接收设备响应于所述数据分享请求，显示第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收所述文件对象。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述接收设备响应于用户针对所述文件对象的接收操作，与所述第一终端建立文件传输连接；其中，所述文件传输连接包括无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接或超宽带UWB连接。
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述位置信息包括：所述第二终端的指南针角度、所述第二终端的BLE信号到达角度AoA，所述一个或多个附近终端与所述终端的距离。
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备；
    所述第一终端接收用户的确认发送操作；
    所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备，具体包括：
    响应于所述确认发送操作，所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述一个或多个第二终端中，存在有多个第三终端相对于所述终端的方向与所述滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值时，所述接收设备在所述多个第三终端中，相对于所述第一终端的方向在所述滑动方向上的投影距离最近。
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端通过BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端根据所述一个或多个第二终端的位置信息以及所述第一终端的指南针角度，
    确定所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离；
    所述第一终端显示所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离。
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端通过BLE广播发送AoA广播包给所述一个或多个第二终端；
    所述第二终端在接收到所述AoA广播包后，根据接收到所述AoA广播包时的相位信息确定出所述BLE信号AoA，并根据接收到所述AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI确定出与所述第一终端的距离；
    所述第二终端通过BLE广播发送的所述BLE AoA、所述第二终端与所述第一终端的距离和所述第二终端的指南针角度。
  10. 一种终端，所述终端为第一终端，其特征在于，包括：处理器、蓝牙模块，存储器，触控屏，无线高保真Wi-Fi模块；其中，所述处理器和所述存储器耦合，所述处理器与所述蓝牙模块和所述触控屏连接；
    所述触控屏，用于显示文件展示界面，所述文件展示界面中显示有文件对象；
    所述触控屏，还用于接收用户针对所述文件对象的滑动操作；
    所述处理器，用于响应于所述滑动操作，指示所述蓝牙模块通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二设备的位置信息；
    所述处理器，还用于根据所述滑动操作的滑动方向、所述终端的指南针角度以及所述设备一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从所述一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备；其中，在所述一个或多个第二终端中，所述接收设备相对于所述第一终端的方向与所述滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值；所述接收设备相对于所述第一终端的方向由所述第一终端的指南针角度以及所述接收设备的位置信息确定；
    所述Wi-Fi模块，用于发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述蓝牙模块，还用于：
    在通过BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播定位请求；其中，所述第二终端接收到所述定位请求时的BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述蓝牙模块，还用于：
    在所述Wi-Fi模块发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备之前，发送数据分享请求给所述接收设备；所述数据分享请求用于请求所述接收设备输出第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收所述文件对象。
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述Wi-Fi模块，还用于在所述接收设备检测到用户针对所述文件对象的接收操作后，与所述接收设备建立无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接。
  14. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述位置信息包括：所述第二终端的指南针角度、所述第二终端的BLE信号到达角度AoA，所述一个或多个附近终端与所述终端的距离。
  15. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述触控屏，还用于：
    在所述Wi-Fi模块发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备之前，显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备；
    所述触控屏，还用于接收用户的确认发送操作；
    所述Wi-Fi模块，具体用于：
    响应于所述确认发送操作，发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  16. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，当所述一个或多个第二终端中，存在有多个第三终端相对于所述终端的方向与所述滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值时，所述接收设备在所述多个第三终端中，相对于所述第一终端的方向在所述滑动方向上的投影距离最近。
  17. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述处理器，还用于：
    在所述蓝牙模块通过BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之后，根据所述一个或多个第二终端的位置信息以及所述第一终端的指南针角度，确定所述一个或多多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离；
    所述触控屏，还用于显示所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离。
  18. 根据权利要求10所述的终端，其特征在于，所述蓝牙模块，还用于：
    在通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播发送AoA广播包给所述一个或多个第二终端；其中，所述AoA广播包用于所述第二终端根据接收所述AoA广播时的相位信息确定出所述BLE AoA，并根据接收到所述AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI确定出与所述第一终端的距离；
    所述蓝牙模块，还用于接收所述第二终端通过BLE广播发送的所述BLE AoA、所述第二终端与所述第一终端的距离和所述第二终端的指南针角度。
  19. 一种芯片系统，其特征在于，包括：处理器和蓝牙芯片；其中，
    所述处理器，用于指示触控屏显示文件展示界面，所述文件展示界面中显示有文件对象；
    所述处理器，还用于通过所述触控屏接收用户针对所述文件对象的滑动操作；
    所述处理器，还用于响应于所述滑动操作，指示所述蓝牙芯片通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二设备的位置信息；
    所述处理器，还用于根据所述滑动操作的滑动方向、所述终端的指南针角度以及所述设备一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，从所述一个或多个第二终端中确定出接收设备；其中，在所述一个或多个第二终端中，所述接收设备相对于所述第一终端的方向与所述滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值；所述接收设备相对于所述第一终端的方向由所述第一终端的指南针角度以及所述接收设备的位置信息确定；
    所述处理器，还用于指示无线高保真Wi-Fi模块发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的芯片系统，其特征在于，所述蓝牙芯片，还用于：
    在通过BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播定位请求；其中，所述第二终端接收到所述定位请求时BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的芯片系统，其特征在于，所述蓝牙芯片，还用于：
    在所述处理器指示所述Wi-Fi模块发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备之前，发送数据分享请求给所述接收设备；所述数据分享请求用于请求所述接收设备输出第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收所述文件对象。
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的芯片系统，其特征在于，所述处理器，还用于：
    在所述接收设备检测到用户针对所述文件对象的接收操作后，指示所述WiFi模块与所述接收设备建立无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接。
  23. 根据权利要求19所述的芯片系统，其特征在于，所述位置信息包括：所述第二终端的指南针角度、所述第二终端的BLE信号到达角度AoA，所述一个或多个附近 终端与所述终端的距离。
  24. 根据权利要求19所述的芯片系统，其特征在于，所述处理器，还用于：
    在指示所述Wi-Fi模块发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备之前，指示所述触控屏显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备；
    所述处理器，还用于通过所述触控屏接收用户的确认发送操作；
    所述处理器，具体用于：
    响应于所述确认发送操作，指示所述Wi-Fi模块发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  25. 根据权利要求19所述的芯片系统，其特征在于，当所述一个或多个第二终端中，存在有多个第三终端相对于所述终端的方向与所述滑动方向的夹角小于预设角度阈值时，所述接收设备在所述多个第三终端中，相对于所述第一终端的方向在所述滑动方向上的投影距离最近。
  26. 根据权利要求19所述的终端，其特征在于，所述处理器，还用于：
    在所述蓝牙芯片通过BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之后，根据所述一个或多个第二终端的位置信息以及所述第一终端的指南针角度，确定所述一个或多多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离；
    所述处理器，还用于指示所述触控屏显示所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离。
  27. 根据权利要求19所述的终端，其特征在于，在通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，通过BLE广播发送AoA广播包给所述一个或多个第二终端；其中，所述AoA广播包用于所述第二终端根据接收所述AoA广播时的相位信息确定出所述BLE AoA，并根据接收到所述AoA广播包时的RSSI确定出与所述第一终端的距离；
    所述蓝牙芯片，还用于接收所述第二终端通过BLE广播发送的所述BLE AoA、所述第二终端与所述第一终端的距离和所述第二终端的指南针角度。
  28. 一种数据分享的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一终端显示文件选择界面，所述文件选择界面中显示有用户已选定的文件选项；
    所述第一终端接收用户的第一操作；
    响应于所述第一操作，所述第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息；
    所述第一终端根据所述一个或多个第二终端的位置信息，确定所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离；
    所述第一终端显示所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离；
    所述第一终端接收用户选择所述一个或多个第二终端中接收设备的第二操作；
    响应于所述第二操作，所述第一终端发送所述文件选项对应的文件对象给所述接收设备。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端显示所述一个或多个第二终端相对于所述第一终端的方向和距离，具体包括：
    所述第一终端显示所述第一终端的位置标记和所述一个或多个第二终端的位置标记；其中，所述第二终端的位置标记相对应于所述第一终端的位置标记的方向和距离由所述第一终端的指南针角度以及所述第二终端的位置信息确定；
    所述第二操作，具体包括：
    所述用户针对所述接收设备的位置标记的操作。
  30. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端通过低功耗蓝牙BLE获取来自一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端通过BLE广播定位请求；其中，所述第二终端接收到所述定位请求时的BLE信号强度值RSSI高于指定信号强度阈值。
  31. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端发送所述文件选项对应的文件对象给所述接收设备之前，所述方法包括：
    所述第一终端发送数据分享请求给所述接收设备；
    所述接收设备响应于所述数据分享请求，显示第一提示，用于提示用户确认接收所述文件对象。
  32. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述接收设备响应于用户的确认接收操作，与所述第一终端建立文件传输连接；其中所述文件传输连接包括无线高保真点对点Wi-Fi P2P连接或超宽带UWB连接。
  33. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端发送所述文件选项对应的文件对象给所述接收设备之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端显示第二提示，用于提示用户确认是否发送所述文件选项对应的文件对象给所述接收设备；
    所述第一终端接收用户的确认发送操作；
    所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备，具体包括：
    响应于所述确认发送操作，所述第一终端发送所述文件对象给所述接收设备。
  34. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述终端通过低功耗BLE获取一个或多个第二终端的位置信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端通过BLE广播发送到达角AoA广播包给所述一个或多个第二终端；
    所述第二终端在接收到所述AoA广播包后，根据接收到所述AoA广播包时的相位信息确定出所述BLE信号AoA，并根据接收到所述AoA广播包时的BLE RSSI确定出与所述第一终端的距离；
    所述第二终端通过BLE广播发送所述BLE信号AoA、所述第二终端与所述第一终端的距离。
PCT/CN2020/107034 2019-08-08 2020-08-05 数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统 WO2021023208A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910731372.4 2019-08-08
CN201910731372.4A CN112437190B (zh) 2019-08-08 2019-08-08 数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021023208A1 true WO2021023208A1 (zh) 2021-02-11

Family

ID=74502690

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/107034 WO2021023208A1 (zh) 2019-08-08 2020-08-05 数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112437190B (zh)
WO (1) WO2021023208A1 (zh)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113055976A (zh) * 2021-03-15 2021-06-29 深圳乐播科技有限公司 基于局域网的无线投屏方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN113179445A (zh) * 2021-04-15 2021-07-27 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 基于互动物品的视频分享方法、互动物品
CN113282223A (zh) * 2021-04-29 2021-08-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 显示方法、显示装置和电子设备
CN113296647A (zh) * 2021-05-08 2021-08-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 界面显示方法及装置
CN113613050A (zh) * 2021-07-20 2021-11-05 北京奇艺世纪科技有限公司 视频同步播放方法、装置、电子设备及存储介质
CN114143769A (zh) * 2021-12-08 2022-03-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 内容分享方法、装置、设备、介质及计算机程序
CN114585085A (zh) * 2022-04-26 2022-06-03 浙江口碑网络技术有限公司 一种定位方法、定位装置和定位系统
US20220324272A1 (en) * 2021-03-30 2022-10-13 Nanjing Silergy Micro Technology Co., Ltd. Tire pressure monitoring module, tire localization system and tire localization method
TWI826034B (zh) * 2022-10-07 2023-12-11 宏碁股份有限公司 影像過曝改善方法及電子裝置
WO2024046347A1 (zh) * 2022-09-01 2024-03-07 华为技术有限公司 一种数据分享方法、系统及相关装置

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114501119B (zh) * 2020-10-27 2023-04-07 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 互动显示方法、装置、电子设备、系统及存储介质
CN114610193B (zh) * 2020-12-04 2024-10-11 华为技术有限公司 内容共享方法、电子设备及存储介质
CN115118536B (zh) * 2021-03-18 2024-04-30 上海博泰悦臻网络技术服务有限公司 分享方法、控制设备及计算机可读存储介质
CN113992789A (zh) * 2021-10-29 2022-01-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 图像处理方法及装置
CN114518811A (zh) * 2022-01-26 2022-05-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 基于卷轴屏的信息交互方法、装置及电子设备
CN115103346A (zh) * 2022-07-25 2022-09-23 润芯微科技(江苏)有限公司 一种基于uwb实现的文件分享方法及系统

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070146347A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2007-06-28 Outland Research, Llc Flick-gesture interface for handheld computing devices
US20110163944A1 (en) * 2010-01-05 2011-07-07 Apple Inc. Intuitive, gesture-based communications with physics metaphors
CN102549574A (zh) * 2009-10-02 2012-07-04 高通股份有限公司 用于提供文件共享功能性的用户接口示意动作和方法
CN103003810A (zh) * 2010-05-24 2013-03-27 索尼电脑娱乐美国公司 方向感知性信息共享
CN103257813A (zh) * 2012-02-21 2013-08-21 海尔集团公司 一种共享设备的确定方法和文件传输方法以及系统
CN104094183A (zh) * 2011-11-16 2014-10-08 高通股份有限公司 用于在用户设备之间无线地共享数据的系统和方法
CN104750410A (zh) * 2013-12-27 2015-07-01 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 电子装置及其文件分享方法及计算机程序产品
CN106293404A (zh) * 2015-05-22 2017-01-04 联发科技（新加坡）私人有限公司 多屏幕共享显示画面的方法及通信终端
CN106603609A (zh) * 2015-10-16 2017-04-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 文件发送、传输方法及装置
CN109089216A (zh) * 2018-10-25 2018-12-25 连尚（新昌）网络科技有限公司 一种基于蓝牙传输的文件传输方法及设备
CN110719584A (zh) * 2019-09-02 2020-01-21 华为技术有限公司 近距离传输信息的方法和电子设备

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140108084A1 (en) * 2012-10-12 2014-04-17 Crestron Electronics, Inc. Initiating Schedule Management Via Radio Frequency Beacons
CN103841190B (zh) * 2014-02-28 2018-04-03 广州华多网络科技有限公司 信息获取方法、信息分享方法、装置和系统
CN106354407B (zh) * 2016-08-22 2019-11-15 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种信息分享方法及移动终端
WO2018145311A1 (zh) * 2017-02-13 2018-08-16 深圳市欸阿技术有限公司 数据分享系统、智能终端、第一智能终端

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070146347A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2007-06-28 Outland Research, Llc Flick-gesture interface for handheld computing devices
CN102549574A (zh) * 2009-10-02 2012-07-04 高通股份有限公司 用于提供文件共享功能性的用户接口示意动作和方法
US20110163944A1 (en) * 2010-01-05 2011-07-07 Apple Inc. Intuitive, gesture-based communications with physics metaphors
CN103003810A (zh) * 2010-05-24 2013-03-27 索尼电脑娱乐美国公司 方向感知性信息共享
CN104094183A (zh) * 2011-11-16 2014-10-08 高通股份有限公司 用于在用户设备之间无线地共享数据的系统和方法
CN103257813A (zh) * 2012-02-21 2013-08-21 海尔集团公司 一种共享设备的确定方法和文件传输方法以及系统
CN104750410A (zh) * 2013-12-27 2015-07-01 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 电子装置及其文件分享方法及计算机程序产品
CN106293404A (zh) * 2015-05-22 2017-01-04 联发科技（新加坡）私人有限公司 多屏幕共享显示画面的方法及通信终端
CN106603609A (zh) * 2015-10-16 2017-04-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 文件发送、传输方法及装置
CN109089216A (zh) * 2018-10-25 2018-12-25 连尚（新昌）网络科技有限公司 一种基于蓝牙传输的文件传输方法及设备
CN110719584A (zh) * 2019-09-02 2020-01-21 华为技术有限公司 近距离传输信息的方法和电子设备

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113055976A (zh) * 2021-03-15 2021-06-29 深圳乐播科技有限公司 基于局域网的无线投屏方法、装置、设备及存储介质
US20220324272A1 (en) * 2021-03-30 2022-10-13 Nanjing Silergy Micro Technology Co., Ltd. Tire pressure monitoring module, tire localization system and tire localization method
CN113179445A (zh) * 2021-04-15 2021-07-27 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 基于互动物品的视频分享方法、互动物品
CN113282223A (zh) * 2021-04-29 2021-08-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 显示方法、显示装置和电子设备
CN113282223B (zh) * 2021-04-29 2024-06-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 显示方法、显示装置和电子设备
WO2022228097A1 (zh) * 2021-04-29 2022-11-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 显示方法、显示装置和电子设备
CN113296647A (zh) * 2021-05-08 2021-08-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 界面显示方法及装置
CN113613050B (zh) * 2021-07-20 2022-08-30 北京奇艺世纪科技有限公司 视频同步播放方法、装置、电子设备及存储介质
CN113613050A (zh) * 2021-07-20 2021-11-05 北京奇艺世纪科技有限公司 视频同步播放方法、装置、电子设备及存储介质
CN114143769A (zh) * 2021-12-08 2022-03-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 内容分享方法、装置、设备、介质及计算机程序
CN114585085A (zh) * 2022-04-26 2022-06-03 浙江口碑网络技术有限公司 一种定位方法、定位装置和定位系统
WO2024046347A1 (zh) * 2022-09-01 2024-03-07 华为技术有限公司 一种数据分享方法、系统及相关装置
TWI826034B (zh) * 2022-10-07 2023-12-11 宏碁股份有限公司 影像過曝改善方法及電子裝置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112437190A (zh) 2021-03-02
CN112437190B (zh) 2023-04-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021023208A1 (zh) 数据分享的方法、图形用户界面、相关装置及系统
WO2021027616A1 (zh) 一种通过遥控器实现一碰投屏的终端设备、方法以及系统
CN112469015B (zh) 蓝牙连接的方法和电子设备
CN112822663B (zh) 蓝牙连接方法及相关装置
US20220039179A1 (en) Bluetooth Connection Method and Device
JP2022529033A (ja) ブルートゥース接続方法、デバイス、およびシステム
CN112469013B (zh) 一种蓝牙连接方法及相关装置
WO2020259542A1 (zh) 一种显示设备的控制方法及相关装置
WO2022100610A1 (zh) 投屏方法、装置、电子设备及计算机可读存储介质
WO2021023046A1 (zh) 一种电子设备控制方法及一种电子设备
WO2021043219A1 (zh) 一种蓝牙回连方法及相关装置
WO2021017909A1 (zh) 一种通过nfc标签实现功能的方法、电子设备及系统
US20220179827A1 (en) File Sharing Method of Mobile Terminal and Device
WO2022068513A1 (zh) 无线通信方法和终端设备
CN114499587B (zh) 音频同步的通信方法、系统、无线耳机、终端及存储介质
WO2022028537A1 (zh) 一种设备识别方法及相关装置
WO2021043250A1 (zh) 一种蓝牙通信方法及相关装置
JP2022537012A (ja) マルチ端末マルチメディアデータ通信方法及びシステム
WO2021197354A1 (zh) 一种设备的定位方法及相关装置
WO2021027623A1 (zh) 一种设备能力发现方法及p2p设备
WO2021218544A1 (zh) 一种提供无线上网的系统、方法及电子设备
WO2022100219A1 (zh) 数据转移方法及相关装置
CN113365274A (zh) 一种网络接入方法和电子设备
CN114489876A (zh) 一种文本输入的方法、电子设备和系统
WO2022042460A1 (zh) 一种设备的连接方法及电子设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20850759

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20850759

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1